Menu

Luke 12:33 — Word Study

Depth

N1904πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην· ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει·

BSAdo sellpōleō theho possessionshuparchō [all that you have, your goods] of yousu andkai do givedidōmi [bestow, grant] alms;eleēmosunē [needy, those in poverty] do makepoieō to yourselvesheautou pursesballantion [money bags, treasure stores] not growing old,palaioō [become old, decay] a treasurethēsauros [riches, wealth] unfailinganekleiptos [never failing, unfailing] inen theho heavensouranos [the spiritual realm] wherehopou thiefkleptēs [one who steals, a robber] notou does draw nearengizō [comes near, draws near] noroude mothsēs [an insect that destroys, corruption] destroy;diaphtheirō [corrupts, ruins]

Word
Listen & take awayLuke 12
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 33 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (diaphtheirō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Luke 12:33quick helps
In a sentenceJesus instructs His followers to sell their possessions and give to the poor, emphasizing the importance of storing up eternal treasures in heaven.
Who is speakingJesus, addressing His disciples.
Where we areIn a teaching moment about priorities and generosity.
The hard wordἐλεημοσύνην
Take awayThe focus is on eternal wealth rather than temporary possessions.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectκλέπτης verbπωλέω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

1 of 24 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Luke 12:33

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Teaching on Generositygenerated

32Do not be afraid, little flock, for your Father is pleased to give you the kingdom.
33Sell your possessions and give to the poor. Provide yourselves with purses that will not wear out, an inexhaustible treasure in heaven, where no thief approaches and no moth destroys.
34For where your treasure is, there your heart will be also.
35Be dressed for service and keep your lamps burning.

Luke 12:33 is part of a larger discourse where Jesus encourages His followers to prioritize spiritual wealth over material possessions. He reassures them not to fear, as God is pleased to give them the kingdom. This passage emphasizes the importance of generosity and the eternal rewards that come from giving to those in need, contrasting earthly wealth with heavenly treasures.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Luke 18:22On hearing this, Jesus told him, “You still lack one thing: Sell everything you own and give to the poor, and you will have treasure in heaven. Then come, follow Me.”
2Matthew 19:21Jesus told him, “If you want to be perfect, go, sell your possessions and give to the poor, and you will have treasure in heaven. Then come, follow Me.”
3Acts 2:45Selling their possessions and goods, they shared with anyone who was in need.
4Acts 4:34–35There were no needy ones among them, because those who owned lands or houses would sell their property, bring the proceeds from the sales,
52 Corinthians 8:2In the terrible ordeal they suffered, their abundant joy and deep poverty overflowed into rich generosity.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 11 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ἐλεημοσύνην, eleēmosunēgenerated

The word ἐλεημοσύνη (eleemosunē) refers to acts of charity or almsgiving, derived from the root ἐλεέω, meaning to show mercy. It signifies a compassionate response to those in need, highlighting the moral obligation to help the poor.

In this verse, it is used in the context of giving to the needy, reflecting Jesus' teaching on the importance of generosity. The lexicons consistently affirm its association with mercy and kindness toward the less fortunate.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as give to the poor, which is echoed in the KJV and ASV. These versions maintain the focus on charitable giving.

Where translations differ is primarily on the rendering of ἐλεημοσύνην. The KJV and others use alms, while the WEB opts for gifts to the needy, emphasizing the act of giving rather than the term for charity.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is πωλήσατε, sell, which governs the actions of selling and giving. This is followed by a series of clauses that detail what to do with the proceeds and the nature of the treasure being stored.

The structure includes imperative verbs directing the audience to sell possessions and give alms, creating a clear call to action. The clauses are tightly linked, emphasizing the relationship between earthly actions and heavenly rewards.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἐλεημοσύνη does not have a direct equivalent in the Septuagint but is conceptually linked to the Hebrew terms for charity and kindness, such as חֶסֶד (chesed), which emphasizes mercy and benevolence.

The idea of almsgiving as a form of righteousness is consistent with Old Testament teachings on caring for the poor, as seen in various passages that highlight the importance of generosity.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Luke 12:33 teaches that Jesus encourages His followers to sell their possessions and give to the poor, promising that they will have treasures in heaven that cannot be destroyed. This highlights the importance of generosity and the eternal value of helping those in need.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean to give alms?

Giving alms refers to the act of providing for the poor and needy, often through financial support or charitable donations, as a demonstration of compassion.

Why does Jesus emphasize storing treasures in heaven?

Jesus emphasizes this to redirect His followers' focus from temporary earthly wealth to eternal spiritual rewards, encouraging them to invest in what lasts forever.

How can I practically apply this teaching in my life?

You can apply this teaching by looking for opportunities to help those in need, whether through financial support, volunteering, or acts of kindness.

What does it mean that treasures in heaven cannot be destroyed?

This means that spiritual rewards and the impact of generous actions endure beyond this life, unlike material possessions that can be lost or damaged.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways can I be more generous with my resources?
  2. How does the idea of eternal treasures influence my view of material possessions?
  3. What practical steps can I take to support those in need in my community?
  4. How can I remind myself daily of the importance of storing up treasures in heaven?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers reference this verse to discuss the importance of charity and the eternal implications of generosity.

Clement of AlexandriaThe Stromata Book 4 c. 150–215
But our true "treasure" is where what is allied to our mind is, since it bestows the communicative power of righteousness, showing that we must assign to the habit of our old conversation what we have acquired by it,
Early Church Fathers on Luke 12 →
CyprianTreatise VIII On Works and Alms c. 200–258
Therefore in the Gospel, the Lord, the Teacher of our life and Master of eternal salvation, quickening the assembly of believers, and providing for them for ever when quickened, among His divine commands and precepts of heaven,
Early Church Fathers on Luke 12 →
CyprianTreatise XII. Three Books of Testimonies Against the Jews. c. 200–258
Of the benefit of good works and mercy. In Isaiah: "Cry aloud," saith He, "and spare not; lift up thy voice like a trumpet; tell my people their sins, and the house of Jacob their wickednesses.
Early Church Fathers on Luke 12 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Luke 12:33 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Sell that ye have, and give alms,.... Since they had a kingdom bequeathed them by their heavenly Father, they should be so far from indulging an anxious care about food and raiment, that when there

Read John Gill on Luke 12 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And he said unto his disciples, Therefore I say unto you, Take no thought for your life, what ye shall eat; neither for the body, what ye shall put on.

Read Robert Jamieson on Luke 12 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Ver. 33,34. The immutable purpose of the Divine Being to glorify the disciples of Christ, the freedom of the Divine will in the gift of heaven and glory, are neither of them exclusive of, but include and suppose, their duty to use such due means as he hath directed them, in the use of which they shall obtain what he hath purposed for them, and promised to them; some of which are here directed and prescribed. Sell that ye have, and give alms, & c. It is a precept of the same import with that, . Though possibly the precept here given to the disciples of Christ generally is not to be interpreted so strictly as seemeth to be our Saviour’ s meaning in those texts, as to the young man. For it…

Read Matthew Poole on Luke 12 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

33 Sell that ye have, and give alms; provide yourselves bags which wax not old, a treasure in the heavens that faileth not, where no thief approacheth, neither moth corrupteth. Ver. 33. A treasure in the heavens] As a merchant being to travel into a far country, doth deliver his money here upon the exchange that so he may be sure to receive it again at his arrival in that country; so let us that are passing into another country lay up something that may stand us in stead in that day.

Read John Trapp on Luke 12 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(33) Sell that ye have.—In its generalised form the precept is peculiar to St. Luke, but it has its parallel in the command given to the young ruler. (See Note on Matthew 19:21.) It was clearly one of the precepts which his own characteristic tendencies led him to record (see Introduction), and which found its fulfilment in the overflowing love that showed itself in the first days of the Church of the Apostles (Acts 2:45). Subsequent experience may have modified the duty of literal obedience, but the principle implied in it, that it is wise to sit loose to earthly possessions, possessing them as though we possessed not (1 Corinthians 7:30), is one which has not lost its force. Provide…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Luke 12 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 33. Sell that ye have] Dispose of your goods. Be not like the foolish man already mentioned, who laid up the produce of his fields, without permitting the poor to partake of God's bounty: turn the fruits of your fields (which are beyond what you need for your own support) into money, and give it in alms; and the treasure thus laid out, shall be as laid up for yourselves and families in heaven. This purse shall not grow old, and this treasure shill not decay. Ye shall by and by find both the place where you laid up the treasure, and the treasure itself in the place; for he who hath pity on the poor lendeth unto the Lord; and he may rest assured, that whatever, for Christ's sake, he…

Read AdamClarke on Luke 12 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

33. Sell that ye have] This command was taken very literally by the early Church, Acts 2:44-45. Comp. Luke 16:9; Matthew 19:21.

Read Cambridge on Luke 12 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Sell that ye have - Sell your property. Exchange it for that which you can use in distributing charity. This was the condition of their being disciples.

Read Albert Barnes on Luke 12 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Sell your possessions and give to the poor. Provide yourselves with purses that will not wear out, an inexhaustible treasure in heaven, where no thief approaches and no moth destroys.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Sell what you have and give gifts to the needy. Make for yourselves purses which don’t grow old, a treasure in the heavens that doesn’t fail, where no thief approaches and no moth destroys.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Sell your possessions and give to the poor. Provide yourselves with purses that will not wear out, an inexhaustible treasure in heaven, where no thief approaches and no moth destroys.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Sell your possessions and give to the poor. Provide yourselves purses that do not wear out – a treasure in heaven that never decreases, where no thief approaches and no moth destroys.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Sell that ye have, and give alms; provide yourselves bags which wax not old, a treasure in the heavens that faileth not, where no thief approacheth, neither moth corrupteth.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

Sell that which ye have, and give alms; make for yourselves purses which wax not old, a treasure in the heavens that faileth not, where no thief draweth near, neither moth destroyeth.

RVARevised Version, American1894

Sell that ye have, and give alms; make for yourselves purses which wax not old, a treasure in the heavens that faileth not, where no thief draweth near, neither moth destroyeth.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Sell what ye have, and give alms: provide yourselves bags which become not old, a treasure in the heavens that faileth not, where no thief approacheth, neither moth corrupteth.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Sell that ye haue, and giue almes: make you bagges, which waxe not old, a treasure that can neuer faile in heauen, where no theefe commeth, neither mothe corrupteth.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

Sell what ye possess and give alms; make to yourselves purses which do not grow old, a treasure which does not fail in the heavens, where thief does not draw near nor moth destroy.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

sell your goods, and give alms, make to yourselves bags that become not old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens, where thief doth not come near, nor moth destroy;

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

sell your goods, and give alms, make to yourselves bags that do not become old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens, where thief does not come near, nor moth destroy;

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Sell your possessions and give to the poor. Make for yourselves purses which will not wear out—treasure in the heavens that does not run out, where no thief comes near, and no moth destroys.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

Sell what you possess and give alms. Make to yourselves bags which grow not old, a treasure in heaven which faileth not: where no thief approacheth, nor moth corrupteth.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

Sell what you have, and give the money to the poor. Get yourselves purses that don't wear out: treasure in heaven that will never run out, where no thief can steal it and no moth can destroy it.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Give what property you have in exchange for money, and give the money to the poor; make for yourselves money-bags which will not get old, wealth stored up in heaven which will be yours for ever, where thieves will not come nor worms put it to destruction.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ὑπάρχονταhuparchō possessions G5225 2 different renderings
possessionsBSB MSB NETB ULB
your goodsLSV YLT
ἐλεημοσύνην·eleēmosunē alms; G1654 2 different renderings
almsASV DBY DRA KJV LSV NWB RVA YLT
needyWEB
βαλλάντιαballantion purses G905 2 different renderings
pursesASV BSB DBY FBV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB
money bagsBBE
θησαυρὸνthēsauros a treasure G2344 3 different renderings
a treasureASV DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NETB NWB RVA WEB YLT
treasureBSB FBV MSB ULB
wealthBBE
οὐρανοῖςouranos heavens G3772 2 different renderings
heavensASV DBY KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
heavenBBE BSB DRA FBV MSB NETB
κλέπτηςkleptēs thief G2812 2 different renderings
thiefASV BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
thievesBBE

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseclauseverbΠωλήσατεSellnoun phrase · objectnoun phraseτὰtheclauseverbὑπάρχονταpossessionsὑμῶνof youκαὶandclauseverbδότεgiveobjectἐλεημοσύνηνalmsclauseverbποιήσατεmakeindirect objectἑαυτοῖςto yourselvesnoun phrase · objectnoun phraseβαλλάντιαpursesadjective phraseclauseadverbialμὴnotverbπαλαιούμεναgrowing oldnoun phrasenoun phraseθησαυρὸνa treasureἀνέκλειπτονunfailingprepositional phraseἐνinnoun phrasenoun phraseτοῖςtheοὐρανοῖςheavensclauseclauseadverbialὅπουwheresubjectκλέπτηςthiefadverbialοὐκnotverbἐγγίζειdoes draw nearοὐδὲnorclausesubjectσὴςmothverbδιαφθείρειdestroy

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Vendite quæ possidetis, et date eleemosynam. Facite vobis sacculos, qui non veterascunt, thesaurum non deficientem in cælis : quo fur non appropriat, neque tinea corrumpit.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܙܒܢܘ ܩܢܝܢܟܘܢ ܘܗܒܘ ܙܕܩܬܐ ܥܒܕܘ ܠܟܘܢ ܟܝܣܐ ܕܠܐ ܒܠܝܢ ܘܣܝܡܬܐ ܕܠܐ ܓܝܙܐ ܒܫܡܝܐ ܐܝܟܐ ܕܓܢܒܐ ܠܐ ܩܪܒ ܘܣܣܐ ܠܐ ܡܚܒܠ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην· ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει·

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην· ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει·

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην· ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει·

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην· ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει·

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην· ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει·

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην· ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει·

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην· ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει·

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην· ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει·

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Luke 12:33πωλέωdo selldo sellπωλέωthetheὑπάρχωpossessionspossessionsὑπάρχωσύof youof youσύκαίandandκαίδίδωμιdo givedo giveδίδωμιἐλεημοσύνηalms;alms;ἐλεημοσύνηποιέωdo makedo makeποιέωἑαυτοῦto yourselvto yourselvesἑαυτοῦβαλλάντιονpursespursesβαλλάντιονμήnotnotμήπαλαιόωgrowing oldgrowing old,παλαιόωθησαυρόςa treasurea treasureθησαυρόςἀνέκλειπτοςunfailingunfailingἀνέκλειπτοςἐνininἐνthetheοὐρανόςheavensheavensοὐρανόςὅπουwherewhereὅπουκλέπτηςthiefthiefκλέπτηςοὐnotnotοὐἐγγίζωdoes draw ndoes draw nearἐγγίζωοὐδέnornorοὐδέσήςmothmothσήςδιαφθείρωdestroy;destroy;διαφθείρωοὐNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. no, noοὐὑπόPrep. by, Prep. by, underὑπόἔλεοςn.m. & n.nn.m. & n.n. pitἔλεοςβάλλωv. I cast,v. I cast, throβάλλωπαλαιόςAdj old, aAdj old, ancienπαλαιόςτίθημιv. I put, v. I put, placeτίθημιἄλφαletter theletter the firsἄλφαὅςRel.pr. whRel.pr. who, whὅςκλέπτωv. I stealv. I stealκλέπτωἐγγύςAdv nearAdv nearἐγγύςδιαβάλλωv. I slandv. I slander, cδιαβάλλωπράσσωv. I do, fv. I do, fare, πράσσωεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκὄροςn.n. a moun.n. a mountainὄροςπτωχόςAdj poor, Adj poor, destiπτωχόςμήNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. not, lμήβρῶσιςn.f. eatinn.f. eating, foβρῶσις
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Luke 12:33

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
πωλήσατεpōleō do sell G4453 Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · plural
22× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to sell something, like a merchant selling goods. It appears in Matthew 21:12 and Revelation 13:17, and is used to describe the act of exchanging or bartering something for something else.
Tyndale gloss
to sell
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πωλέω (pōleō) means to sell or barter, derived from a root suggesting trade. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Luke 17:28 and Revelation 13:17, often referring to the act of selling goods or property. The lexicons agree on its primary meaning, with no significant disagreement noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πωλέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for מכר;]

to exchange or barter.

to sell: Lk 17:28, Re 13:17; οἱ πωλοῦντες, Mt 21:12 25:9, Mk 11:15, Lk 19:45; c. acc. rei, Mt 13:44 19:21 21:12, Mk 10:21 11:15, Lk 12:33 18:22 22:36, Jo 2:14, 16, Ac 5:1 (sc. αὐτά, αὐτόν), Ac 4:34, 37. Pass., I Co 10:25; c. gen.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πωλέω, -&; imp. ἐπώλουν; 1 aor. ἐπώλησα ; pres. pass. πωλοῦμαι; (πέλω, πέλομαι, to turn, turn about, [Curtius § 633 p. 470], fr. which [through the noun πωλή; Lod. in Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 57 bot.] πωλοῦμαι, Lat. versor, foll. by εἰς with acc. of place, to frequent a place; ef. the Lat. venio and veneo); fr. Hdt. down; Sept. for 720; prop. to barter, i. 6. to sell: absol. (opp. to ἀγοράζει), Lk. xvii. 28; Rev. xiii. 17; of πωλοῦντες (opp. to of dyopd¢ovres, buyers), sellers, Mt. xxi. 12; xxv.9; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45; with acc. of a thing, Mt. xiii. 44; xix. 21; xxi. 12; Mk. x. 21; xi. 15; Lk. [xii. 33]; xviii. 22; xxii. 36; Jn. ii. 14,16; Acts v.1; supply αὐτόν, Acts iv. 37; αὐτά, ib. 34; pass. 1 Co. x. 25; with a gen. of price added, Mt. x. 29; Lk. xii. 6.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πωλέω. From meaning originally ‘‘put up for sale’’ (sendzfo) πωλέω came to mean simply ‘‘sell” (endo). This later sense, which alone is found in the NT, can be fully illustrated from the papyri, e.g. PSI IV. 3567 (B.c. 253-2) οὐθεὶς οὖν ἐν τοῖς τόποις πωλεῖ πρὸς σῖτον, ἀλλὰ πρὸς ἀργύριον, P Ryl LL. 1138 (Δ.1.133) μόλις πάντα τὰ ἐμαυτοῦ πωλήσας ἐδυνήθην πληρῶσαι, “I was with difficulty able to complete this by selling all my property ” (cf. Mk τοῦ), P Oxy III. 49428 (a Will—A.p. 156) ἐξέστω 80 αὐτῆς πωλεῖν καὶ ὑποτίθεσθαι ἃ ἐὰν aipfrat, ‘‘she shall have the right to ell or mortgage on her own authority whatever she chooses, "ἢ 76. VI. 03219 (late ii/A.D.) τὰ χοιρίδια χωρὶς μοῦ μὴ πώλι, “do not sell the young pigs without me,” P Tebt IT. 4215 (iii/A.p.) (= Se/ections, p. 106) θέλις αὐτὸ πωλῆσαι], πώλησον, ‘if you wish to sell it, sell it,” and P Oxy I. 83} (A.D. 327), where an egg-seller…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πωλέω (pōleō) — to sell.

πωλ-έω,

Ionic dialectimperfect πωλέεσκε [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future -ήσω[Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialect 3rd.pers. plural πωλησεῦντι [Refs 1st c.AD+]: aorist ἐπώλησα [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—passive, future in middle form πωλήσεται [Refs 4th c.BC+] future πεπωλήσεται [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐπωλήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—sell or offer for sale, opposed to ὠνεῖσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ἀποδίδοσθαι (of the actual sale), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μετ᾽ ἀβακίου καὶ τραπεζίου π. ἑαυτόν sell oneself across the counter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] sold at a high price for exportation to Sardis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πωλέω οὐδενὸς χρήματος refuse to sell it at any price, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν μικροῦ λήμματος π. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἔρωμαι ὁπόσου πωλε; ask what he wants for it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν Ἀσίην πωλῶ πρὸς μύρα[Refs]; π. τινί τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τι πρός τινας [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πωλέω

poleo

probably ultimately from pelomai (to be busy, to trade); to barter (as

a pedlar), i.e. to sell:--sell, whatever is sold.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πωλέω

v.

I sell

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πωλέω pōleō 22x

to sell, Mt. 10:29; 13:44

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πωλέω πωλέω,

to exchange or barter goods, to sell or offer for sale, Hdt., attic; c. gen. pretii, ἐς Σάρδις χρημάτων μεγάλων π. to sell at a high price for exportation to Sardis, Hdt.; ἐπώλεε οὐδενὸς χρήματος refused to sell it at any price, id. Hdt.; ἐρέσθαι ὁπόσου πωλεῖ to ask what he wants for it, Xen.; absol., π. πρός τινα to deal with one, Ar.

π. τέλη to let out the taxes, Lat. locare, Aeschin.

to sell, i. e. give up, betray, Dem.:—of persons, to be bought and sold, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAM-2P — Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · plural
aorist active imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAM-2P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
41%selling
selling41% · 9×do sell18% · 4×having sold5% · 1×sold5% · 1×being sold5% · 1×sell5% · 1×sold?5% · 1×he sells5% · 1×other renderings14% · 3×

22 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb91%adverbial9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 22 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καθέδραa seat, chairἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pπᾶςall, the whole,
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ὅσοςμήNeg
ἀσσάριονa small coin
στρουθίονa small bird, sp
καίand, even, also, nam
ὑπάγωI go away, depar
ὑπάγωI go away, depart
εἰμίI am, exist
πωλέωdo sell22×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀγοράζωI buyεἷςoneδίδωμιI offer, give
Article the
περιστεράa doveὑπάρχωI am, exist, am ἱμάτιονouter garment
φέρωI carry, bear, bring
Article the
ὅσος
ἔχωI have, hold, po
σύ
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπωλέω · 22× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Revelation
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 8 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 122c. AD 40

οἱ μὲν γὰρ διδόντες, ἀμοιβὴν ἔπαινον ἢ τιμὴν θηρώμενοι, ζητοῦντες χάριτος ἀντίδοσιν, εὐπρεπεῖ δωρεᾶς ὀνόματι κυρίως πρᾶσιν ἐργάζονται, ἐπεὶ καὶ τοῖς πωλοῦσιν ἀνθ’ ὧν ἂν παράσχωσιν ἔθος λαμβάνειν ἐστίν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.39c. AD 75–95

Ἰώσηπον δὲ πωλούμενον ὑπὸ τῶν ἐμπόρων ὠνησάμενος Πετεφρὴς ἀνὴρ Αἰγύπτιος ἐπὶ τῶν Φαραώθου μαγείρων τοῦ βασιλέως εἶχεν ἐν πάσῃ τιμῇ καὶ παιδείαν τε τὴν ἐλευθέριον ἐπαίδευε καὶ διαίτῃ χρῆσθαι κρείττονι τῆς ἐπὶ δούλῳ τύχης ἐπέτρεπεν ἐγχειρίζει τε τὴν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Mich. 10 583Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 78

καὶ εἰσοδεύοντας καὶ ἐξοδεύοντας καὶ κατασπῶντας καὶ ἀνοικοδομοῦντας ἐν αὐτοῖς ὡς ἐὰν αἱρῶνται ἔτι πωλοῦντας ὑποτιθέντας ἑτέροις μεταδιοικοῦντας χρωμένους αὐτοῖς καθʼ ὃν ἐὰν βούλωνται τρόπον ἀπαραποδίστως, καὶ πρὸς τὰ

P.Mich. 10 584Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 84

ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ ἐὰν βούλωνται καὶ ἐνοικοῦντας καὶ ἐνοικίζοντας καὶ τὰ ἐνοίκια ἀποφερομένους καὶ πωλοῦντας καὶ ὑποτιθέντας καὶ οἰκονομοῦντας περὶ αὐτῶν καθʼ ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῶνται τρόπον ἀπαραποδίστως. ἐνμενέτωσαν οὖν

P.Mil.Vogl. 1 23Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 108

ἕκαστος ἐπανείρηται καὶ τὰ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος ιβ ἔτους περιεσόμενα ἀποφερομένους καὶ πωλοῦντας καὶ ὑποτιθεμένους καὶ οἰκονομοῦντας περὶ αὐτῶν, ὡς ἐὰν αἱρώμεθα, καὶ … αρεξεσθαι ἐφʼ ἃ

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
τὰho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APN — Article · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
ὑπάρχονταhuparchō possessions G5225 Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · plural · neuter
60× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be already in existence, like something or someone that was present from the start. It appears in Acts 19:40 and 27:12, describing things that were already happening. It can also mean to be ready or at hand.
Amplified meaning
all that you have, your goods
Tyndale gloss
be already
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑπάρχω (*hyparcho*) is built from the roots meaning 'under' and 'begin.' It encompasses meanings such as 'to begin,' 'to exist,' and 'to belong to.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including Acts 19:40 and 28:18, where it conveys existence or possession. Notably, the lexicons do not present significant disagreement regarding its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπάρχω

[in LXX for הָיָה, יֵשׁ, לוּן, etc.; τ. ὑπάρχοντα for מִקְנֶה, רְכוּשׁ, etc. ;]

to begin, make a beginning (Hom., Hdt., al.).

to be in existence, be ready, be at hand (Hdt., Thuc., al.): Ac 19:40 27:12, 21; seq. ἐν, Ac 28:18.

to be, prop, expressing continuance of an antecedent state or condition (cf. Gifford, Incarnation, 11 ff.; MM, xxv): c. nom. pred., Lk 8:41 9:48, Ac 4:34 7:55 8:16 16:3 19:36 21:20, I Co 7:26 12:22, Ja 2:15, II Pe 3:11; ptcp. c. pred., Lk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπάρχω: impf. ὑπῆρχον; 1. prop. to begin below, to make a beginning; univ. to begin; (Hom., Aeschyl., Hat., sqq-). 2. to come forth, hence to be there, be ready, be at hand, (Aeschyl., Hdt., Pind., sqq.): univ. and simply, Acts xix. 40 [cf. B. § 151, 29 note]; xxvii. 12, 21; ἔν rem, to be found in one, Acts xxviii. 18; with a dat. of the pers. ὑπάρχει μοί τι, something is mine, I have something: Acts iii. 6; iv. 37; xxviii. 7; 2 Pet. i. 8 (where Lehm. παρόντα; Sir. xx. 16; Prov. xvii. 17; Job ii. 4, ete.) ; τὰ ὑπάρχοντά τινι, one’s substance, one’s property, Lk. viii. 3; xii. 15 Ltxt. T Tr WH; Acts iv. 32, (Gen. xxxi. 18; Tob. iv. 8; Dio C. 38,40); also τὰ ὑπ. τινος, Mt. xix. 21; xxiv.47; xxv. 14; Lk. xi. 21; xii. 15 RG Lmrg., 33, 44 [here L mrg. Tr mrg. the dat.]; xiv. 33; xvi. 1; xix. 8; 1 Co. xiii. 3; Heb. x. 34, (often in Sept. for 1391, Wi39, 0°DD3; Sir. xli.1; Tob. i. 20, ete.; τὰ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπάρχω. The idea of falling back upon a ‘‘basis,’’ and hence of continuity with a previous state, which originally belonged this verb (cf. Hort ad Jas 215), seems gradually to have faded in later Greek, as the following exx. show—P Petr III. 64(4.)!* (iii/B.c.) τοῦτο (sc. τὸ ὀψώνιον) ὑπάρξει 7 τιμὴ τῶν εὑρεθέντων] παρὰ Τασύθει, ‘this will be made up by the price of the articles discovered in the possession of Tasuthis” (Edd.), P Hib I. γ218 (B.c. 241) τὴμ μὲν σφραγῖδα ὡμολόγουν ὑπάρχειν ἐν τῶι ἀδύτωι, ‘confessed that the seal was in the sanctuary”’ (Edd.), P Oxy IX. 11Sgl® (c. A.D. 117) περὶ γραφῆς τῶν τοῖς [᾿1Ι]ουδαίοις ὑπαρξάντων, ‘about ἃ list of property which belonged to the Jews”.(Ed.), 7. VI. 93317 (late ii/a.D.) πάντα αὐτῇ ὑπῆρκται, “everything was provided for her” (Edd.), 2d. 90518 (a.p. [2 ὑπείκω 170) (= Selections, p. 87) a marriage contract, where the giver of the bride has…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπάρχω (huparchō) — be already.

ὑπάρχω,

future

__A -ξω[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ὑπῆρξα (see. below [Refs]:—passive, future ὑπαρχθήσομαι [Refs 3rd c.AD+]perfect ὕπηργμαι, Ionic dialect -αργμαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—begin, take the initiative:—Constr.:

__A.1 absolutely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁ ὑπάρξας the beginner (in a quarrel), [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.2 with genitive, take the initiative in, begin, ἀδίκων ἔργων, ἀδικίης, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.3 with participle, take the initiative in doing, ἐμὲ ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιεῦντες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑπάρχει εὖ (or κακῶς) ποιῶν τινα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἀμύνεσθαι οἷσπερ καὶ οἱ Λκεδαιμόνιοι ὑπῆρξαν retaliating by the means which the L. had used first, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπάρχω

huparcho

from 5259 and 756; to begin under (quietly), i.e. come into existence

(be present or at hand); expletively, to exist (as copula or

subordinate to an adjective, participle, adverb or preposition, or as

an auxiliary to a principal (verb):--after, behave, live.

see GREEK for 5259

see GREEK for 756

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπάρχω

v.

I am, exist, am in possession

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπάρχω hyparchō 60x

to begin; to come into existence; to exist; to be, subsist, Acts 19:40; 28:18; to be in possession, to belong, Acts 3:6; 4:37; goods, possessions, property, Mt. 19:21; Lk. 8:3; to be, Lk. 7:25; 8:41

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπάρχω fut. ξω aor1 ὑπῆρξα Pass., perf. ὕπηργμαι ionic -αργμαι to begin, make a beginning, absol., Od., Eur., etc.

c. gen. to make a beginning of, ἀδικίης Hdt.; πολλῶν κακῶν Eur., etc.

c. part to begin doing, ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιεῦντες Hdt.; ὑπάρχει εὖ ποιῶν τινα Xen.

c. acc., ὑπ. εὐεργεσίας εἴς τινα or τινι to begin [doing] kindnesses to one, Dem., Aeschin.:—Pass. to be begun, τὰ ἔκ τινος ὑπαργμένα (ionic for ὑπηργ-) Hdt.:—impers., ὑπῆρκτο αὐτοῦ a beginning of it had been made, Thuc.

to begin to be, come into being, arise, spring up, Aesch., etc.

to be in existence, to be there, to be ready, Hdt., attic;—c. gen., ὑπάρχει τῶνδε there is store of these things, Aesch.:—oft. in part., ἡ ὑπάρχουσα οὐσία the existing property…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-APN — Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-APN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
38%being
being38% · 23×possessions23% · 14×were5% · 3×be5% · 3×was3% · 2×existing3% · 2×other renderings13% · 8×other renderings10% · 6×

61 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb58%verb38%object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 60 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐκσύ
σύ
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐνγάρfor
αὐτός
ὀφθαλμόςthe eyeμήτηρa motherπατήρfather, Father,
οὖνtherefore, then
προφήτηςa prophet, poetγένοςoffspring, famil
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
πόλιςa cityσύ
ὑπάρχωpossessions60×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
δίδωμιI offer, giveπίπτωI fall, fall undἐκμυκτηρίζωI deride, scoff
αὐτός
καθίστημιI set, establishλέγωI say, speakἀγρόςa field, the cou
Article the
θεόςGod, a godγυνήa woman, wife, mπατρικόςpaternal, ancest
ἐν
Article theβάσανοςtorture, tormentἐγώ
σύ
καίand, even, also,μετάἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπάρχω · 60× in the New Testament
Acts Luke 1 Corinthians 2 Peter Matthew 2 Corinthians Galatians Philippians Hebrews James Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 47 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 150c. AD 40

ἀκράτου γὰρ ἔτι τῆς λογικῆς φύσεως ὑπαρχούσης ἐν ψυχῇ καὶ μηδενὸς ἀρρωστήματος ἢ νοσήματος ἢ πάθους παρεισεληλυθότος, τὰς φαντασίας τῶν σωμάτων καὶ πραγμάτων ἀκραιφνεστάτας λαμβάνων εὐθυβόλους ἐποιεῖτο τὰς κλήσεις, εὖ μάλα στοχαζόμενος τῶν…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.259c. AD 75–95

Λιμοῦ δὲ τὴν γῆν καταλαβόντος Ἴσακος, δόξαν αὐτῷ χωρεῖν εἰς Αἴγυπτον τῆς χώρας ἀγαθῆς ὑπαρχούσης, ἐπὶ Γεράρων ἀπῄει τοῦ θεοῦ κελεύσαντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.10c. AD 100

εἰ γὰρ μὴ ἦλθεν ἐν σαρκί, οὐδ̓ ἄν πως οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐσώθησαν βλέποντες αὐτόν, ὅτε τὸν μέλλοντα μὴ εἶναι ἥλιον, ἔργου τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχοντα, ἐμβλέποντες οὐκ ἰσχύουσιν εἰς τὰς ἀκτῖνας αὐτοῦ ἀντοφθαλμῆσαι:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἀδιαιρέτου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ πεδίωι Παθύρεως

P.Adl. 19Pathyris99 BC

ἡμέρας ἑκάστης· ἡ δὲ πρᾶξις ἔστω Ὥρωι ἔκ τε αὐτοῦ Γαλάτου καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ πάντων πράσσοντι καθάπερ ἐκ δίκης. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
ὑμῶνsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύof you2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
δότεdidōmi do give G1325 Verb · second aorist · active · imperative · second person · plural
414× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To give, as seen in Matthew 4:9 and John 1:12, means to bestow or grant something to someone, often with a sense of generosity or sacrifice, like God giving his only son in John 3:16
Amplified meaning
bestow, grant
Tyndale gloss
to give
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δίδωμι, transliterated as didōmi, means 'to give' and is used in a wide range of contexts, including bestowing, granting, and delivering. It appears frequently in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 4:9 and John 3:16. The word is built from a primary verb and has various forms and constructions, indicating its flexibility in usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δίδωμι,

[in LXX chiefly for נתן (53 words in all) ;]

to give—in various senses, acc. to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Ac 20:35; c. acc. rei et dat. pers., Mt 4:9 5:31, Jo 1:12, al. mult.; c. dat. pers., seq. ἐκ, Mt 25:8; id. c. gen. part.. Re 2:17; c. acc. pers., Jo 3:16, Re 20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Ga 2:9; φίλημα, Lk 7:45; γνῶσιν, Lk 1:77; κρίσιν, Jo 5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δίδωμι (διδῶ, Rev. iii. 9 LT WH; [δίδω Tr, yet see WH. App. p. 167]), 3 pers. plur. διδόασι (Rev. xvii. 13 [not Rec.]), impv. δίδου (Mt. v. 42 RG); impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐδίδου, 3 pers. plur. ἐδίδουν (ἐδίδοσαν, Jn. xix. 3 LT Tr WH [see ἔχω); fut. δώσω; 1 aor. ἔδωκα [2 pers. sing. -xes, Jn. xvii. 7 Trmrg., 8 Trmrg.; cf. reff. s. v. κοπιάω)], subjunc. δώσῃ [and δώσωμεν] fr. an imaginary indic. form ἔδωσα, [ Mk. vi. 37 T Trmrg.]; Jn. xvii. 2 (Tr mrg. WH δώσει) ; Rev. viii. 3 (LT Tr WH δώσει; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; B. 36 (31); W. 79 (76); [Veitch s. v. 618. fin., also Soph. Lex. s. v. and esp. Intr. p. 40; WH. App. p. 172]); pf. δέδωκα [on the interchange between the forms of the pf. and of the aor. in this verb ef. B. 199 (172)]; plpf. ἐδεδώκειν and without augm. [W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)] dedaxew, Mk. xiv. 44; and L txt. T Tr WH in Lk. xix. 15; 3 pers. plur. δεδώκεισαν, Jn. xi. 57; 2…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δίδωμι structed by Kenyon, P Lond I. p. 2ff. For a specimen of their petitions see P Par 26 (B.C. 163-2), reproduced in Selections, p. 12 ff. It opens—Baordret Πτολεμαίῳ καὶ Βασιλίσσῃ Κλεοπάτρᾳ τῇ ἀδελφῇ, θεοῖς Φιλομήτορσι, χαίρειν. Θανὴς καὶ Taods δίδυμαι, αἱ λειτουργοῦσαι ἐν τῷ πρὸς Μέμφει μεγάλῳ Σαραπιείῳ κτὰ. From 20.15 Kal ἐκ τούτων καὶ τῶν προτοῦ γενηθεισῶν δ[ι]δύμων κομισαμένων τὰ ἑαυτῶν καθ᾽ ἡμέραν δέοντα, we learn that the Twins were there ex officio as twins, in connexion with some Dioscuric cultus: see Rendel Harris Soanerges, p. 272. From later documents it will be enough to quote P Oxy IIT. 533%® (ii/ili A.p.) εὔπατε Kal τοῖς διδύμοις ὅτι προνοήσζα]τε τοῦ κερματίου, “Ὑ16}1 the twins also to be careful about the small change” (Edd.). The frequency of Didymus as a proper name we compare the Latin Geminus and Gemellus (cf. for the latter the farmer whose correspondence at end…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δίδωμι (didōmi) — to give.

δίδωμι,

[Refs 8th c.BC+] (late δίδω [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; late forms, 1st pers. plural διδόαμεν see reading in [Refs 1st c.AD+]; but thematic forms are frequently used, especially in Epic dialect and Ionic dialect, διδοῖς, διδοῖσθα, [Refs 8th c.BC+], διδοῖ [Refs 8th c.BC+], uncertain in Attic dialect, [Refs 6th c.BC+], Epic dialect δίδωθι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive διδόναι, also διδοῦν [Refs 6th c.BC+], Epic dialect διδοῦναι [Refs 8th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect δίδων [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; participle διδούς, Aeolic dialect δίδοις [Refs 7th c.BC+]imperfect ἐδίδουν -ους -ου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Epic dialect δίδου [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἐδίδοσαν [Refs 8th c.BC+] codices (ἀπ-), also ἔδιδον probably in [Refs]; Epic dialect iterative δόσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future δώσω [Refs], Epic dialect διδώσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive δωσέμεναι [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δίδωμι

didomi

a prolonged form of a primary verb (which is used as an alternative in

most of the tenses); to give (used in a very wide application,

properly, or by implication, literally or figuratively; greatly

modified by the connection):--adventure, bestow, bring forth, commit,

deliver (up), give, grant, hinder, make, minister, number, offer, have

power, put, receive, set, shew, smite (+ with the hand), strike (+

with the palm of the hand), suffer, take, utter, yield.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δίδωμι

v.

I offer, give

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δίδωμι didōmi 415x

pluperfect, ἐδεδώκειν, to give, bestow, present, Mt. 4:9; 6:11; Jn. 3:16; 17:2, et al. freq.; to give, cast, throw, Mt. 7:6; to supply, suggest, Mt. 10:19; Mk. 13:11; to distribute alms, Mt. 19:21; Lk. 11:41; to pay tribute, etc., Mt. 22:17; Mk. 12:14; Lk. 20:22; to be the author or source of a thing, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δίδωμι Redupl. from Root ΔΟ, Lat. do, dare. Orig. sense, to give, τί τινι Hom., etc.; in pres. and imperf. to be ready to give, to offer, id. Hom.

of the gods, to grant, κῦδος, νίκην, and of evils, δ. ἄλγεα, ἄτας, κήδεα id. Hom.; later, εὖ διδόναι τινί to provide well for . . , Soph., Eur.

to offer to the gods, Hom., etc.

with an inf. added, δῶκε τεύχεα θεράποντι φορῆναι gave him the arms to carry, Il.; διδοῖ πιεῖν gives to drink, Hdt., etc.

Prose phrases, δ. ὅρκον, opp. to λαμβάνειν, to tender an oath; δ. χάριν, ῀ χαρίζεσθαι, as ὀργῆι χάριν δούς having indulged his anger, Soph.;— λόγον τινὶ δ. to give one leave to speak, Xen.; but, δ. λόγον ἑαυτῶι to deliberate, Hdt.

c. acc. pers. to give over, deliver up, Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAM-2P — Verb · second aorist · active · imperative · second person · plural
second aorist active imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAM-2P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Plural

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

(nathan, yahabh, sum; didomi): "Give" is a very common word in the Old Testament. It is most frequently the translation of nathan, "to give" (Ge 1:29; 3:6; Ex 2:9; De 18,20, etc., over 800 instances); nathan is also translated "to give up" (De 23:14; Isa 43:6; Ho 11:8); of yahabh, "to give" (Ge 30:1; 1Ch 16:28 the King James Version). In Ps 55:22 we have the perfect with suffix, "Cast thy burden upon Yahweh," margin "what he hath given thee"; elsewhere it is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%give
give9% · 37×do give7% · 31×given7% · 30×gave6% · 25×he gave6% · 23×has given5% · 22×will give4% · 18×i will give4% · 16×other renderings51% · 212×

414 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 86 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 414 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςκλάωI breakαἰτέωI ask, request,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godχάριςgrace, favor, kiαὐτός
ὅς
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐγώσύ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδίδωμιI offer, giveκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
σημεῖονa sign, miracle,καίand, even, also,σελήνηthe moon
δίδωμιdo give414×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theἐξουσίαpower, authorityκαίand, even, also,
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disciἐξουσίαpower, authorityπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
ἐγώ
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ἵναin order that, s
σύ
Article theἐνἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπερισσεύωI exceed, am lefζητέωI seek, search f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδίδωμι · 414× in the New Testament
John Luke Revelation Matthew Mark Acts 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Ephesians Romans 1 John 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 985 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 45c. AD 40

Τῇ δὲ τετάρτῃ ἡμέρᾳ μετὰ τὴν γῆν τὸν οὐρανὸν ἐποίκιλλε διακοσμῶν, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ τοῦτον ἐν ὑστέρῳ γῆς ἔταττε, τῇ μὲν ἐλάττονι φύσει προνομίαν διδούς, τὴν δὲ κρείττονα καὶ θειοτέραν δευτερείων ἀξιῶν, ἀλλ’ εἰς ἔνδειξιν ἐναργεστάτην κράτους ἀρχῆς.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.20c. AD 75–95

οὔτε γὰρ αὐτῷ ποτʼ ἂν γενέσθαι νοῦν ἀγαθὸν τῷ νομοθέτῃ ταύτης ἀπολειπομένῳ τῆς θέας, οὔτε τῶν γραφησομένων εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον οὐδὲν ἀποβήσεσθαι τοῖς λαβοῦσιν, εἰ μὴ πρὸ παντὸς ἄλλου διδαχθεῖεν, ὅτι πάντων πατήρ τε καὶ δεσπότης ὁ θεὸς ὢν καὶ πάντα…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι· ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι, τὸν

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι. ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι, τὸν

μέν μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι, ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι Ταθώτηι

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
ἐλεημοσύνην·eleēmosunē alms; G1654 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Charity or almsgiving, like the good deeds done by Tabitha in Acts 9:36. It refers to acts of kindness and generosity towards the poor.
Amplified meaning
needy, those in poverty
Tyndale gloss
charity
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐλεημοσύνη (i.e., *eleemosynē*) means mercy or pity and specifically refers to acts of charity or almsgiving. It is derived from the root ἐλεέω and is used in the New Testament to describe acts of kindness towards the poor, as seen in verses like Matthew 6:2-4 and Luke 11:41. The lexicons indicate that it has a strong connection to concepts of beneficence and compassion.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† ἐλεημοσύνη, -ης, ἡ

(< ἐλεέω),

[in LXX chiefly for חֶסֶד, צְדָקָה ;]

mercy, pity.

almsgiving, alms (like the German Almosen, a corruption of the Greek word ἐ): Mt 6:4; ποιεῖν ἐ., Mt 6:2, 3, Ac 9:36 10:2 24:17; ἐ. διδόναι, Lk 11:41 (cf. Mt 23:36; Dalman, Words, 62 f.) 12:33; αἰτεῖν, Ac 3:2; λαβεῖν, Ac 3:3; πρὸς (in order to ask) ἐ., Ac 3:10; pl., Ac 10:4, 31 (Cremer…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐλεημοσύνη. In the Christian P Gen I. 51° the writer, after petitioning a certain Amminaeus to use his influence in preventing a widow’s only son from being taken on military service, conlinues—kal 6 @(€d)s ἀποδιδῖ (/. ἀποδιδοῖ) σίο]ι πρὸς τὴν ἐϊλ]εημωσύνην σου. McNeile’s statement (σα Mt 62) that the word is not used specifically for ‘‘almsgiving” earlier than B. Sira will require modification if the early date ascribed to Tobit, in which the word is very frequent, is accepted (cf. Oxford Apocrypha i. p. 183 ff.). The word survives in this sense in MGr.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐλεημοσύνη (eleēmosunē) — charity.

ἐλε-ημοσύνη, ἡ,

pity, mercy, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

2. charity, alms, [LXX+NT+3rd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐλεημοσύνη

eleemosune

from 1656; compassionateness, i.e. (as exercised towards the poor)

beneficence, or (concretely) a benefaction:--alms(-deeds).

see GREEK for 1656

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐλεημοσύνη, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

alms-giving, charity

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐλεημοσύνη eleēmosynē 13x

pity, compassion; in NT an act of kindness, alms, almsgiving, Mt. 6:2, 3, 4; Lk. 11:41

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐλεημοσύνη ἐλεημοσύνη, ἡ, pity, mercy: a charity, alms (which is a corruption of the word), NTest., etc.

from ἐλεήμων

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Alms

Not found in the Old Testament, but repeatedly in the New. The Mosaic legislation (Lev. 25:35; Deut. 15:7) tended to promote a spirit of charity, and to prevent the occurrence of destitution among the people. Such passages as these, Ps. 41:1; 112:9; Prov. 14:31; Isa. 10:2; Amos 2:7; Jer. 5:28; Ezek. 22:29, would also naturally foster the same benevolent spirit.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The duty of alms-giving, especially in kind, consisting chiefly in portions to be left designedly from produce of the field, the vineyard and the oliveyard, (Leviticus 19:9,10; 23:22; 15:11; 24:19; 26:2-13; Ruth 2:2) is strictly enjoined by the law. Every third year also, (14:28) each proprietor was directed to share the tithe of his produce with "the Levite, the stranger, the fatherless and the widow." The theological estimate of alms-giving among the Jews is indicated in the following passages: (Job 31:17; Proverbs 10:2; 11:4; Esther 9:22; Psalms 112:9;

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Asking Joh 9:8; Ac 3:2

→ COMMANDMENTS AND PRACTICES CONCERNING Le 25:35; De 14:28,29; 15:7-11; Isa 58:6,7; Mt 5:42; 6:1-4; 19:21; Lu 11:41; 12:33; Ro 12:8; 2Co 9:5-7; Ga 2:10; 1Ti 6:18; Heb 13:16; 1Jo 3:17

See BENEFICENCE

See GIFTS

See GIVING

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
77%alms
alms77% · 10×acts of charity8% · 1×charity8% · 1×giving8% · 1×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object54%subject23%adverbial15%second object8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,σύπρός
ποιέωI do, make
οὖνtherefore, thenδέbut, on the otheαὐτός
δίδωμιI offer, give
ἔνειμιI am in, withinκαίand, even, also,
αἰτέωI ask, request, beg,
Article the
ἐρωτάωI ask, question, req
ἱερόςa temple
ἐλεημοσύνηalms;13×
what comes after →
μήNeg
σαλπίζωI sound a trumpeγινώσκωI come to know,
ποιέωI do, make
ἑαυτοῦεἰς
σύ
ἀναβαίνωI go up, mount, μιμνῄσκωI remember, reca
ἐν
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁράωI see, look upon

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐλεημοσύνη · 13× in the New Testament
Acts Matthew Luke
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 16 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome The Didache
Clement of RomeSecond Clement 16.4c. AD 96

καλὸν οὖν ἐλεημοσύνη ὡς μετάνοια ἁμαρτίας: κρείσσων νηστεία προσευχῆς, ἐλεημοσύνη δὲ ἀμφοτέρων: ἀγάπη δὲ καλύπτει πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν, προσευχὴ δὲ ἐκ καλῆς συνειδήσεως ἐκ θανάτου ῥύεται.

The DidacheThe Didache 1.6c. AD 100

ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ τούτου δὲ εἴρηται: Ἱδρωσάτω ἡ ἐλεημοσύνη σου εἰς τὰς χεῖράς σου, μέχρις ἂν γνῷς, τίνι δῷς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD
P.Gen. 1 51Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)AD 326–AD 375

ἔλθῃ ἔξω μετὰ τῶν ἐκλεγομένων εἰς κωμιδᾶτον, καὶ ὁ θεὸς ἀποδιδοῖ σοι πρὸς τὴν ἐλεημοσύνην σου καὶ ἀνυψοῖ σε εἰς τὰ μείζονα· καθὼς ἐξέβην ἀπὸ σοῦ ἤνεγκα Σπ

P.Herm. 17LykopolisAD 376–AD 400

Λεῦχις Μαλάμου. ἡ χρηστότης σου κατέλαβεν πάντας τοὺς μὴ δυναμένους· καὶ ἐμὲ φθάσῃ ἡ ἐλεημοσύνην σου, κύριε. μετὰ τὸν Θεὸν τὴν σὴν βοήθειαν προσδοκῶ, ἵνα ἀξιώσῃς τὸν τριβοῦνον τῶν

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
ποιήσατεpoieō do make G4160 Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · plural
566× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to make or do something, and it's used in a very broad sense. It can mean to create, produce, or cause something to happen. In the Bible, it's often used to describe God's creative power, like in Matthew 19:4 and Mark 10:6.
Tyndale gloss
to do/make: do
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ποιέω is a Greek verb meaning 'to make' or 'to do,' with a wide range of applications including creating, producing, or performing actions. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts relating to God's creative acts or human actions, such as making sacrifices or preparing feasts. Notably, it can also imply causing something to happen or fulfilling a purpose. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ποιέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה;]

to make, produce, create, cause: c. acc. rei, Mt 17:4, Mk 9:5, Jo 9:11, Ac 9:39, Ro 9:20, al.; of God as Creator (c. acc. pers. also), Mt 19:4, Mk 10:6, Lk 11:40, Ac 4:24, He 1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mt 20:12 (cf. Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ποιέω, -@ 4 ποιεω 14; ἱμάτια, Acts ix. 39; ναούς, Acts xix. 24; σκηνάς, Mt xvii. 4; Mk. ix. 5; Lk. ix.33; τύπους, Acts vii. 43; πηλόν, Jn. ix. 11, 14; πλάσμα, Ro. ix. 20; ace. to some interpreters (also W. 256 n.! (240 n.2)) ὁδὸν ποιεῖν, to make a path, Mk. ii. 23 RG T Tr txt. WH txt. (so that the meaning is, that the disciples of Christ made a path for themselves through the standing grain by plucking the heads; see ὁδοποιέω, fin. If we adopt this interpretation, we must take the ground that Mark does not give us the true account of the matter, but has sadly corrupted the narrative received from others; [those who do accept it, however, not only lay stress on the almost unvarying lexical usage, but call attention to the fact that the other interpretation (see below) finds the leading idea ex. pressed in the par ticiple—an idiom apparently foreign to the N. T. (see W. 353 (381)), and to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ποιέω the sheep” (Edd.), 74. I. 1138 (ii/A.D.) εὖ ποιήσεις ἀγοράσεις pot (δραχμὰς) B. In 26. VI. 929%27 (ii/iii Δ...) καλῶς ποιήσεις is followed first by a part. ἀπαιτήσας, and then by ἀποκαταστῆσαι. The phrase μὴ ἄλλως ποιήσεις is used in cases of urgency as in the letter already quoted, 76. II. 294}" (A.D. 22) μὴ οὖν ἄλλως ποιήσις, ἐγὼ δὲ αὐτὸς οὕπω οὐδὲ ἐνήλεπα (= ἐναλήλιφα sc. ἐμαυτὸν) ἕως ἀκούσω φάσιν παρὰ σοῦ περὶ ἁπάντων, ‘be sure to do this; Iam not so much as anointing myself until I hear word from you on each point ” (Edd.). For the strong sense of ποιέω, ‘‘am effective,” as in the “‘working”’ of charms, cf. P Osl I. 141 (iv/a.bD.) εἰς πάντα ποιῶν, with the editors note. In P Oxy XII. 1480! (a.p. 32) πεπόητε εἰς τὸν ἐκλογιστήν, instead of the editors’ rendering ‘‘ he has made it (a delay spoken of) as far as the eclogistes is concerned (?),” Olsson (Papyrusbriefe, p. 75)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ποιέω (poieō) — to do/make: do.

ποιέω,

Doric dialect ποιϝέω [Refs], etc.: Epic dialect imperfect ποίεον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; contraction ποίει [Refs]; Ionic dialect ποιέεσκον [Refs 5th c.BC+]future ποιήσω: aorist ἐποίησα, Epic dialect ποίησα [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect πεποίηκα:—middle, Ionic dialect imperfect ποιεέσκετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future ποιήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist ἐποιησάμην, Epic dialect ποι- [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect πεποίημαι in middle sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, future ποιηθήσομαι (μετα-) [Refs 4th c.BC+], see above; πεποιήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐποιήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect πεποίημαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—Attic dialect ποῶ [Refs], etc., is guaranteed by metre in Trag. and Comedy texts, as ποῶ [Refs 5th c.BC+], and found in codex Laur. of [Refs 5th c.BC+] (ποήσω), 82.9 (ποεῖ), 154.7 (ἐποησάτην), etc.; but ποι- is always written before -οι, -ου, -ω in…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ποιέω

poieo

apparently a prolonged form of an obsolete primary; to make or do (in

a very wide application, more or less direct):--abide, + agree,

appoint, X avenge, + band together, be, bear, + bewray, bring (forth),

cast out, cause, commit, + content, continue, deal, + without any

delay, (would) do(-ing), execute, exercise, fulfil, gain, give, have,

hold, X journeying, keep, + lay wait, + lighten the ship, make, X

mean, + none of these things move me, observe, ordain, perform,

provide, + have purged, purpose, put, + raising up, X secure, shew, X

shoot out, spend, take, tarry, + transgress the law, work, yield.

Compare 4238.

see GREEK for 4238

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ποιέω

v.

I do, make

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ποιέω poieō 568x

pluperf., πεποιήκειν, to make, form, construct, Mt. 17:4; Mk. 9:5; Jn. 2:15; of God, to create, Mt. 19:4; Acts 4:24; to make, prepare a feast, etc., Mt. 22:2; Mk. 6:21; met. to make, establish, ratify, a covenant, Heb. 8:9; to make, assume, consider, regard, Mt. 12:33; to make, effect, bring to pass, cause to take place, do, accomplish, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ποιέω Att. Poets often use the penult. short, as ποιῶ, ποιεῖν, etc., which are often written ποῶ, ποεῖν, etc., as in Lat. poeta, poesis. the perfect passive is also used in middle sense Used in two general senses, to make and to do.

to make, produce, create, in Hom. often of building, π. δῶμα, τεῖχος, etc.; of smith's work, π. σάκος Il.; of works of art, id. Il., etc.; ποιεῖν τι ἀπὸ ξύλου to make something of wood, Hdt.; π. πλοῖα ἐξ ἀκάνθης id. Hdt.; so, c. gen., π. νηὸν λίθου id. Hdt.; φοίνικος αἱ θύραι πεποιημέναι Xen.:—Mid., οἰκία ποιήσασθαι to build them houses, Il.; also, to have a thing made, get it made, Hdt., Dem.

to make, create, ἕτερον φίλιππον ποιήσετε Dem.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAM-2P — Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · plural
aorist active imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAM-2P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
10%do
do10% · 55×did5% · 30×doing5% · 29×do perform3% · 17×make3% · 16×having done3% · 15×making2% · 14×do make2% · 14×other renderings67% · 389×

579 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 194 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 566 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ὅςοὗτοςεἰμίI am, exist
οὗτος
ἐξουσίαpower, authorityκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
τίςIrg
λέγωI say, speakαὐτόςγινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existπᾶςall, the whole,
ὅς
πᾶςall, the whole, σημεῖονa sign, miracle,καίand, even, also,
ποιέωdo make566×
what comes after →
Article the
θέλημαwill, wish, desiθεόςGod, a godδέbut, on the othe
αὐτός
Article theὁμοιόωI make like, likκατά
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐγώμέγας
ἐν
Article theσάββατονthe Sabbath, a wαὐτός
σύ
Article theἁλιεύςa fishermanἐάνCond

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceποιέω · 566× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 John James Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,563 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 13c. AD 40

Ἓξ δὲ ἡμέραις δημιουργηθῆναί φησι τὸν κόσμον, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ προσεδεῖτο χρόνων μήκους ὁ ποιῶν — ἅμα γὰρ πάντα δρᾶν εἰκὸς θεόν, οὐ προστάττοντα μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ διανοούμενον —, ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ τοῖς γινομένοις ἔδει τάξεως.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.24c. AD 75–95

πρὸς ταύτην οὖν τὴν ὑπόθεσιν ποιεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξέτασιν τοὺς ἀναγνωσομένους παρακαλῶ·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.10c. AD 100

ἀκριβεύεσθαι οὖν ὀφείλομεν, ἀδελφοί, περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας ἡμῶν, ἵνα μὴ ὁ πονηρὸς παρείσδυσιν πλάνης ποιήσας ἐν ἡμῖν ἐκσφενδονήσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς ζωῆς ἡμῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ϛ καὶ ἱερὰς βασιλεῦσιν ἀργυρίου ἐπισήμου δραχμὰς ρκ καὶ μηθὲν ἧσσον ἐπάναγκον αὐτῷ ἔστω ποιεῖν κατὰ τὰ προγεγραμμένα. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν ποιησάτω ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ιε ἔτους, καὶ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστης ἀρτάβης πυροῦ ἧς ἐὰν

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
ἑαυτοῖςheautou to yourselves G1438 Reflexive pronoun · second person · dative · plural · masculine
320× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This reflexive pronoun means 'themself' or 'themselves', referring back to the subject of a sentence, as in Matthew 27:42 and Luke 23:35.
Tyndale gloss
themself
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἑαυτοῦ (i.e., *heautou*) is a reflexive pronoun meaning 'of himself, herself, itself,' and is used primarily in the third person. It appears in various contexts throughout the New Testament, often indicating actions done by a subject to themselves or emphasizing possession. Additionally, it can serve as a reciprocal pronoun in plural forms, indicating mutual actions among individuals.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἑαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -οῦ, dat. -ῷ, etc., acc. -όν, etc., pi. -ῶν, etc. (Att. contr. αὑτοῦ, etc);

reflex pron.;

prop, of 3rd person (Lat. sui, sibi, se), of himself, herself, itself, etc.: Mt 27:42, Mk 15:31, Lk 23:35, al.; added to a middle verb, διεμερίσαντο ἑαυτοῖς, Jo 19:24; to an active verb, Ac 14:14 (M, Pr., 157); ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ, Lk 12:57 21:30, Jo 5:19, al. (v.s. ἀπό); δι’ ἑαυτοῦ, Ro 14:14; ἐν ἑ., Mt 3:9, Mk 5:30, al.; εἰς ἑ., Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἑαυτοῦ (heautou) — themself.

ἑαυτοῦ, ῆς, οῦ, ἑαυτῷ, ῇ, ῷ, ἑαυτόν, ήν, ό,

plural ἑαυτῶν, ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτούς άς, ά: Ionic dialect ἑωυτοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ωὑτῆς [Refs 3rd c.BC+] in Papyrus and Inscrr., as [Refs 1st c.BC+]: Attic dialect contraction αὑτοῦ, etc., which is the usual form in Trag., though ἑαυτοῦ, etc., are used (though rarely) when the metre requires, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ϝιαυτοῦ Kohler-Ziebarth Stadtrecht von Gortyn [Refs]; Doric dialect αὐταυτοῦ, αὐσαυτοῦ (which see); Thess. εὑτοῦ (dative), [Refs]: genitive plural ηὑτῶν [Refs]:—reflexive pronoun of 3rd pers., of himself, herself, itself, etc.; first in [Refs 7th c.BC+], and Attic dialect [Refs 8th c.BC+] itself by itself, absolutely, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ ἐφ᾽ αὑτοῦ[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, ἑαυτοῦ, of themselves, himself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, see at…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἑαυτοῦ, ῆς, οῦ

Refl.pr.

himself, herself, itself

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἑαυτοῦ heautou 319x

himself, herself, itself, Mt. 8:22; 12:26; 9:21; also used for the first and second persons, Rom. 8:23; Mt. 23:31; also equivalent to ἀλλήλων, Mk. 10:26; Jn. 12:19; ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ, ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν, of himself, themselves, voluntarily, spontaneously, Lk. 12:57; 21:30; of one’s own will merely, Jn. 5:19; δι’ ἑαυτοῦ, of itself, in its own nature, Rom. 14:14; ἐξ ἑαυτῶν, of one’s own self, 2 Cor.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἑαυτοῦ reflex. Pron. of 3rd pers., Lat. sui, sibi, se, of himself, herself, itself, etc.; first in Hdt. and attic; Hom. has ἕο αὐτοῦ, οἷ αὐτῷ, ἑ αὐτόν:—αὐτὸ ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτό itself by itself, absolutely, Plat.; so τὸ ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτόν Thuc.; αὐτὸ καθ᾽ αὑτό Plat.;— ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ of himself, Thuc., etc.; ἐν ἑαυτοῦ, ἐντὸς ἑαυτοῦ, Lat. sui compos: — παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ at his own house, Xen.; often with comp. and Sup., ἐγένοντο ἀμείνονες αὐτοὶ ἑωυτῶν they surpassed themselves, Hdt.; πλουσιώτεροι ἑαυτῶν, i. e. continually richer, Thuc.

in attic αὑτοῦ, sometimes for 1st or 2nd pers., Aesch., Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
F-2DPM — Reflexive pronoun · second person · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

F-2DPM Part of Speech: reFlexive pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
34%himself
himself34% · 111×themselves20% · 67×yourselves14% · 48×his own7% · 24×their own6% · 21×ourselves6% · 20×itself3% · 11×other renderings5% · 18×other renderings3% · 11×

331 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 21 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object53%adverbial36%indirect object8%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 320 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
θάπτωI buryεἰςἕκαστοςeach, every one
ἐν
λέγωI say, speakδιαλογίζομαιI reason, debateαὐτός
ἐπί
βασιλείαkingship, sovereἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pοἰκίαa house, househo
πρός
λέγωI say, speakκρατέωI lay hold of, oδιαλογίζομαιI reason, debate
μετά
ἔχωI have, hold, poπαραλαμβάνωI take, receiveλαμβάνωI receive, take
ἑαυτοῦto yourselves320×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
αἴρωI raise, lift upεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inμερίζωI divide, part,
Article the
ἱμάτιονouter garmentἐκοἰκονόμοςa steward
λέγωI say, speak
ὅτιthat, since, becἐάνCondαὐτός
οὐNeg
δύναμαιI am powerful, aἵστημιI cause to standκρίνωI judge, decide,
ἀλλάbut, except
πρόσκαιροςtemporaryArticle theὅσος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἑαυτοῦ · 320× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew 2 Corinthians John Mark Acts Romans 1 Corinthians Ephesians Hebrews Revelation Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.19c. AD 75–95

ἰστέον οὖν, ὅτι πάντων ἐκεῖνος ἀναγκαιότατον ἡγήσατο τῷ καὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ μέλλοντι βίον οἰκονομήσειν καλῶς καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις νομοθετεῖν θεοῦ πρῶτον φύσιν κατανοῆσαι καὶ τῶν ἔργων τῶν ἐκείνου θεατὴν τῷ νῷ γενόμενον οὕτως παράδειγμα τὸ πάντων ἄριστον…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.1c. AD 100

Ἡμερῶν οὖν οὐσῶν πονηρῶν καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἐνεργοῦντος ἔχοντος τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ὀφείλομεν ἑαυτοῖς προσέχοντες ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δικαιώματα κυρίου,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 30Pathyris104 BC

καὶ ἡμῖν δὲ γράφοντες ὑπὲρ ὧν αἱρεῖσθε ὡς πᾶν προθυμότερον τελεωθησόμενον, ἐπιμελόμενοι δὲ καὶ ἑαυτῶν ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους ιδ τοῦ καὶ ια, Παῦνι ιε

P.Grenf. 1 33Thebais104 BC

κζ μέση μελίχρως λεύκωμα ὀφθαλμόν, μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύρριν αἱ τρεῖς τῶν Ψεμμίνιος μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῶν ἀδελφοῦ Παχνούβιος τοῦ προγεγραμμένου καὶ συνπωλουμένου, ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτοῖς πατρικῆς γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν Πτολεμαίδι. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους ιϛ, Θωῦθ η.

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
βαλλάντιαballantion purses G905 Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A purse is a pouch used to carry money, like the one Jesus told his disciples to take in Luke 22:35-36. It is also mentioned in Luke 10:4 and 12:33 as a place to store valuables.
Amplified meaning
money bags, treasure stores
Tyndale gloss
purse
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

βαλλάντιον is a noun meaning a purse or money-bag, derived from a term related to depositories. It appears in the New Testament in Luke 10:4, 12:33, and 22:35, 36. While the spelling variations βαλλάντιον and βαλάντιον exist, they refer to the same object.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βαλλάντιον (Rec. βαλά-), -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX: Jb 14:17 (צְרוֹר), Pr 1:14 (כִּיס), To 1:14 8:2, Si 18:33 א2*;]

a purse: Lk 10:4 12:33 22:35, 36.†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βαλλάντιον (ballantion) — purse.

βαλλάντιον, τό,

bag, pouch, purse, [[Refs 5th c.BC+]; παῖς ἐκ βαλλαντίου a supposititious child, [Refs]

II. javelin (as if from βάλλω), a pun in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]. (The spelling βαλλ-is better attested than that with βαλ-,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare βαλλαντιοτομέω, -τόμος.)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

βαλλάντιον

balantion

probably remotely from 906 (as a depository); a pouch (for

money):--bag, purse.

see GREEK for 906

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βαλάντιον, ου, τό

n.n.

a purse, money-bag

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βαλλάντιον ballantion 4x

also spelled βαλάντιον, a bag, purse, Lk. 10:4; 12:33; 22:35, 36*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APN — Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Thompson Chain Reference topics
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
75%purse
purse75% · 3×purses25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object75%adverbial25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
βαστάζωI carry, carry away,
μήNeg
ἑαυτοῦ
ποιέωI do, make
ἄτερ
σύ
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
Article the
βαλλάντιονpurses
what comes after →
μήNeg
πήραa sack, walletπαλαιόωI make old, decl
καίand, even, also, nam
πήραa sack, wallet
αἴρωI raise, lift up
ὁμοίωςin like manner

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβαλλάντιον · 4× in the New Testament
Luke
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 3rd c. AD
PSI 10 1128OxyrhynchosAD 201–AD 300

οἰκίας αὐτῆς μήτε ὑφαίρεσιν πεποιῆσθαι αὐτοὺς ζεύγους χεροψελίων χρυσοῦ δοκίμου μνᾶς ἀξίου μιᾶς καὶ βαλλαντίου στρατιωτικοῦ ἀσήμου οὐγκιῶν δύο καὶ κοραλλίου τιμήματος οὐκ ἔλαττον δραχμῶν ἑκατόν , μηδὲ συνειδέναι

P.Coll.Youtie 2 84OxyrhynchosAD 301–AD 400

λόγος τῶν ἐμβληθέντων ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ. κέρματος ἀπορρύματα ε κνίδια ὁμοίως β βαλλάντια … οἴνου κεράμια … βωριδίων κεράμια β ἀορτὴ ἱματίων α γάρους μαῦρα α ἐλαίου

O.Douch 5 553Kysis (Oasis Magna)AD 301–AD 425

μου ἀδελφῷ Σαβίνῳ Κολλοῦθος καὶ Παχοῦμις χαίρειν. σπούδασον δέξασθαι παρὰ Μακαρίου Ἀσφυνίτου τὸ μικρὸν βαλλάντιον καὶ ἀπόστειλον ἡμῖν αὐτό. πολλὰ ἀσπαζόμεθα τὴν ἀδελφὴν ἡμῶν Θέκλα. ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὐχόμεθα.

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
μὴ not G3361 Particle · negative
1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.
Tyndale gloss
not
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή () is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
71%not
not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ
ἵναin order that, so th
αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
εἰCond
αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά
μήnot1060×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,
εἰμίI am, exist
δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά
τὶς
σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f
φοβέωI fear, am terrified
ἀπόArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
παλαιούμενα,palaioō growing old, G3822 Verb · present · passive · participle · accusative · plural · neuter
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To make old or become worn out is what this word means. It is used in Hebrews 8:13 to describe something that is old and no longer needed. This can refer to physical things or old ways of thinking.
Amplified meaning
become old, decay
Tyndale gloss
to make old
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παλαιόω means to make old or to declare something obsolete, often used in a passive sense to indicate something that has become worn out over time. It appears in the New Testament, notably in Hebrews 8:13, where it can imply the abrogation of a law. The word is derived from παλαιός, meaning old, and has synonyms like γηράσκω.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παλαιόω, -ῶ

(< παλαιός),

[in LXX chiefly for בּלה, pi., in pass. for בּ׳ qal.;]

to make or declare old: He 8:13; pass., to become old: of things worn out by time and use (cf. Jo 9:13, Is 50:9, al., and v.s. παλαιός), Lk 12:33, He 1:11(LXX); τὸ παλαιούμενον, He 8:13 (where this and the act., v. supr., may have the sense of abrogate, v. LS, Zorell, s.v.).†

SYN.: γηράσκω.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παλαιόω, -@: pf. πεπαλαίωκα ; Pass., pres. ptep. madatovpevos ; fut. παλαιωθήσομαι ; (παλαιός) ; a. to make ancient or old, Sept. for m3; pass. fo become old, to be worn out, Sept. for 773, pny: of things worn out by time and use, as βαλάντιον, Lk. xii. 33 ; ἱμάτιον, Heb. i. 11 (Ps. ci. (cii.) 27; Deut. xxix. 5; Josh. ix. 19 (13); Neh. ix. 21; Is. 1. 9; li. 6; Sir. xiv. 17). pass. τὸ παλαιούμενον, that which is becoming old, Heb. viii. 13 (Plat. symp. p- 208 b.; Tim. p. 59c.). b. to declare a thing to be old and so about to be abrogated: Heb. viii. 13 [see yr paca, fin. ].

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παλαιόω, in pass. = ‘“‘become old,”’ as in Heb 8138: cf. Preisigke 582711 (B.c. 69) πεπαλαιῶσθαι with reference to a temple building. Preisigke Worterbuch s.v. also cites Archiv ii. p- 441, No. 55% (ii/A.p.) τείχη B περιβόλου παλαιωθέντα. In Heb ἀξ the verb on its two occurrences is sometimes understood transitively = ‘‘ abrogate”: so Tindale “She hath abrogat.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παλαιόω (palaioō) — to make old.

πᾰλαιόω,

aorist ἐπαλαίωσα [LXX]: perfect πεπαλαίωκα [NT]: (παλαιός):—make old, [LXX]:—mostly in passive, decay through lapse of time, οἱ παλαιούμενοι νεκροί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πεπαλαιωμένον ἔκπτωμα βραχίονος one which is of long standing, [LXX+5th c.BC+]; of wine, become old, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. abrogate, cancel, [διαθήκην] [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παλαιόω

palaioo

from 3820; to make (passively, become) worn out, or declare

obsolete:--decay, make (wax) old.

see GREEK for 3820

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παλαιόω

v.

I make old, declare obsolete

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παλαιόω palaioō 4x

to make old; pass. to grow old, to become worn, Lk. 12:33; Heb. 1:11; met. to treat as antiquated, to abrogate, supersede, Heb. 8:13*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παλαιόω πα^λαιόω, παλαιός to make old, mostly in Pass. (pres.) to be old or antiquated, βραχίονος π. is of long standing, Hipp.

in Pass. also, to become old, Plat.

like Lat. antiquare, to abrogate a law, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PPP-APN — Verb · present · passive · participle · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPP-APN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

old.

See AGE, OLD.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%growing old
growing old50% · 2×will grow old25% · 1×he has made obsolete25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb75%subject25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
μήNeg
βαλλάντιονa purse, money-b
ἱμάτιονouter garment
ὡςas, like as, how
καινόςfresh, new
λέγωI say, speak
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
παλαιόωgrowing old,
what comes after →
θησαυρόςa treasure, store
ἀνέκλειπτοςunfailing
Article the
πρῶτοςfirst, before
καίand, even, also, nam
γηράσκωI become old, gr

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαλαιόω · 4× in the New Testament
Hebrews Luke
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 12 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
θησαυρὸνthēsauros a treasure G2344 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
17× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for treasure refers to a place of safe keeping or a storehouse, like the treasure Jesus talks about in Matthew 6:18-21. It can also mean the treasure itself, like the riches stored in heaven. In Luke 6:45, it's used to describe the treasure of the heart.
Amplified meaning
riches, wealth
Tyndale gloss
treasure
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θησαυρός refers to a treasure or storehouse, derived from the root of τίθημι, meaning to place or lay up. It encompasses various meanings, including a casket for valuables, a treasury, and metaphorically, the soul as a store of thoughts and feelings. The New Testament uses it in contexts of spiritual wealth and heavenly treasures, particularly in passages like Matthew 6:19-21.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θησαυρός, -οῦ, ὁ

(< τίθημι),

[in LXX chiefly for אוֹצָר;]

a place of safe keeping;

a casket: Mt 2:11;

a treasury (I Mac 3:29 and freq. in cl.);

a storehouse (Ne 13:12, De 28:12, al.): Mt 13:52; metaph., of the soul, Mt 12:35; τ. καρδίας, Lk 6:45.

a treasure: Mt 6:19-21 13:44, Lk 12:33, 34, He 11:26;θ. ἐν οὐρανῷ (v. Dalman, Words, 206 ff.), Mt 19:21,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θησαυρός, -ov, 6, (fr. ΘΕΩ [τίθημι] with the paragog. term.-avpos); Sept. often for 7¥ix; Lat. thesaurus; i.e. 1. the place in which goods and precious things are colleeted and laid up;_ a. a casket, coffer, or other receptacle, in which valuables are kept: Mt.ii. 11. b. a treasury (Hdt., Eur., Plat., Aristot., Diod., Plut., Hdian. ; 1 Mace. iii. 29). ο. storehouse, repository, magazine, (Neh. xiii. 12; Deut. xxviii. 12, ete.; App. Pun. 88, 95): Mt. xiii. 52 [ef. παλαιός, 1]; metaph. of the soul, as the repository of thoughts, feelings, purposes, ete. : (Mt. xii. 8556 LT Tr WH, 35°]; with epex. gen. τῆς καρδίας, ibid. xii. 35 Rec.; Lk. vi. 45. 42. ‘the things laid up ina treasury; collected treasures: Mt. vi. 19-21; Lk. xi 58 5α.; Heb. xi. 26. θησαυρὸν ἔχειν ἐν οὐρανῷ, to have treasure laid up for themselves in heaven, is used of those to whom God has appointed eternal salvation: Mt.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θησαυρός, which survives in MGr, is very common = ‘‘ granary ”’ or τς storehouse” for all kinds of agricultural produce, e.g. corn (P Ryl Il. 2318—a.p. 40) and wine (P Flor II. 1948—A.D. 259): cf. P Oxy I. 101°® (A.D. 142) els δημόσιον θησαυρόν, and Ostr 503 (A.D. 109-110) a receipt for a payment ur (ép) θησ(αυροῦ) iepa(v). In P Tebt I. 657 (B.c. 140-39) in connexion with an Egyptian temple sums are collected—els θησαυροὺς καὶ φιάλας kal ποτήρια : the meaning of θησαυρούς has caused the editors difficulty, but Otto (Priester 1. p- 396) thinks that the ‘‘collection-box ” is meant. A

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θησαυρός (thēsauros) — treasure.

θησαυρός, ὁ,

store, treasure, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θ. χθονός, of the silvermines of Laureion, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἄνθρακες ὁ θ., proverbial, 'apples of Sodom', frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κόμας.., ἱκτήριον θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Διὸς θ., of a tomb marking the fall of a thunderbolt, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἰωνοῖς γλυκὺν θ., of a dead body, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of learning, θ., οὓς κατέλιπον ἐν βιβλίοις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σοφίας θ. [NT+5th c.BC+]

II. strong-room, magazine, [LXX+5th c.BC+]; especially of the treasuries built at Delphi by Greek cities, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; vaults of a bank, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

II.2. granary, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; οἱ δημόσιοι θ. [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

θησαυρός

thesauros

from 5087; a deposit, i.e. wealth (literally or

figuratively):--treasure.

see GREEK for 5087

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θησαυρός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a treasure, store

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θησαυρός thēsauros 17x

a treasury, a store, treasure, precious deposit, Mt. 6:19, 20, 21; a receptacle in which precious articles are kept, a casket, Mt. 2:11; a storehouse, Mt. 12:35

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θησαυρός θησαυρός, ὁ, from ΘΕ, Root of τίθημι a store laid up, treasure, Aesch., Ar.:—metaph., θ. ὕμνων Pind.; Διὸς θ., of fire, Eur.; οἰωνοῖς γλυκὺς θ., of a dead body, Soph.

a store-house, treasure-house, magazine, Hdt.: the treasury of a temple, id. Hdt., Xen.

any receptacle for valuables, a chest, casket, Hdt.; θ. βελέεσσιν, of a quiver, Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

1. A thing of highly-estimated value

Money Ge 42:25,27,28,35; 43:23; with 43:18,21,22

Precious stones 1Ch 29:8

Jesus forbids the hoarding of Mt 6:19; 19:21; Lu 12:33

Hidden Mt 13:44

→ FIGURATIVE

Of the graces of the spirit Pr 21:20; Isa 33:6

Of spiritual understanding Mt 13:52; Col 2:3

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
72%treasure
treasure72% · 13×treasures28% · 5×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object47%adverbial35%subject18%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 17 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰμίI am, existἀνοίγωI openἐκ
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
καίand, even, also,
σύ
θησαυρίζωI store up, treaδέbut, on the othe
ἀγαθόςgood
Article the
πονηρόςevil, bad, wicked
Article the
θησαυρόςa treasure17×
what comes after →
ἐν
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaArticle the
Article the
καρδίαthe heart, innerσοφίαwisdomὀνειδισμόςreproach, revili
αὐτός
προσφέρωI bring to, offeκαινόςfresh, new
σύ
ἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, put o
ἀγαθόςgoodπονηρόςevil, bad, wicke

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθησαυρός · 17× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke 2 Corinthians Colossians Hebrews Mark
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 47 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.104c. AD 40

ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν δύο φύσεις εὕρομεν γενομένας καὶ πλαττομένας καὶ ἄκρως τετορευμένας ὑπὸ θεοῦ, τὴν μὲν ἐξ ἑαυτῆς βλαβερὰν καὶ ἐπίληπτον καὶ κατάρατον, τὴν δὲ ὠφέλιμον καὶ ἐπαινετήν, καὶ ἔχουσαν τὴν μὲν κίβδηλον, τὴν δὲ δόκιμον χαρακτῆρα, καλὴν καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 5.32c. AD 75–95

καὶ ταῦτα μὲν Ἰησοῦς τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν εἰς τοὺς θησαυροὺς παραδίδωσι καταθέσθαι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 11.4c. AD 100

καὶ πάλιν λέγει ὁ προφήτης: Ἐγὼ πορεύσομαι ἔμπροσθέν σου καὶ ὄρη ὁμαλιῶ καὶ πύλας χαλκᾶς συντρίψω καὶ μοχλοὺς σιδηροῦς συγκλάσω, καὶ δώσω σοι θησαυροὺς σκοτεινούς, ἀποκρύφους, ἀοράτους, ἵνα γνῶσιν ὅτι ἐγὼ κύριος ὁ θεός.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Berl.Frisk 1 col. 38Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 155

τὴν στρατηγίαν Θεμίστου καὶ Πολέμωνος μερίδων ὑπὲρ φορέτρων πυροῦ ἀπεργασίας γενομένης ἐπὶ σοὶ ἀπὸ θησαυρῶν Πολέμωνος γενήματος ιζ ἔτους πυροῦ ἀρτάβας ζ ϛ κδ, τιμῆς ὡς τῆς ἀρτάβης ἐκ

P.Berl.Thun. 2 RoTheadelphia? (Arsinoites)AD 168

τοῦ Ἡρακλεοπολίτου νομοῦ ὑπὲρ φορέτρων ἀπεργασιῶν, ὧν ἐδηλώθησαν πεποιῆσθαι ἐπὶ τοῦ προστρατηγήσαντος Ἡλιοδώρου ἀπὸ θησαυρῶν Θεμίστου γενήματος γ ἔτους πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι κθ, δ ἔτους πυροῦ ἀρτάβαι ρξ, ε ἔτους

P.Cair. Isid. 31Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 276

δεκάπρωτος αϛ τοπαρχίας Ἡρακλείδου διʼ ἐμοῦ τοῦ παρόντος Αὐρηλίου Διοσκόρου Σαμποῦτος ἐμετρήθην ἐν θησαυρῷ κώμης Καρανίδος ὀνόματος Ἀσκληπιάδου οὐετρανοῦ ὑπὲρ ἰδιωτικῆς γῆς ὑπὲρ γενήματος τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους πυροῦ

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
ἀνέκλειπτονanekleiptos unfailing G413 Adjective · accusative · singular · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word describes something that never runs out or fails, like the treasures in heaven in Luke 12:33. It means inexhaustible or unfailing.
Amplified meaning
never failing, unfailing
Tyndale gloss
inexhaustible
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀνέκλειπτος (anekleiptos) is built from a negative prefix and a root meaning 'to fail.' It encompasses meanings like 'unfailing' and 'inexhaustible.' The New Testament uses it in Luke 12:33, where it describes something that does not fail. Liddell-Scott mentions additional nuances like 'incessant' and 'infinite,' which are not highlighted in other entries.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* ἀνέκλειπτος, -ον

(< ἀ-, ἐκλείπω),

unfailing: Lk 12:33 (MM, VGT, s.v.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀνέκλειπτος, -ov, (a priv. and ἐκλείπω to fail), unfailing: Lk. xii. 33. ([Hyperid. p. 58

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀνέκλειπτος. In OG/S 383” (i/8.c.) Antiochus of Commagene declares θεραπείαν τε ἀνέγλειπτον καὶ ἱερεῖς ἐπιλέξας σὺν πρεπούσαις ἐσθῆσι Περσικῶι γένει κατέστησα. (The spelling yA, where ἐκ is concerned, is usual in Hellenistic: see BrugmannThumb, Gr. p. 148.) In P Lond 11667 (a.p. 42) (= III. p- 105) contractors undertake to provide τὰ καύματα ἀνέγλειπτα for a bath during the current year. The adverb is found 7GSZ 24987. For a form ἀνεκλιπής, see Wisd 7d 818.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνέκλειπτος (anekleiptos) — inexhaustible.

ἀνέκ-λειπτος, ον,

incessant, uninterrupted, Hy.p.[Refs 1st c.BC+]; infinite, of divisions of space, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; unfailing, [LXX+NT+1st c.BC+]. adverb -τως[Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. ἀ. μᾶζα, in Alchemy, of the asem alloy, [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνέκλειπτος

anekleiptos

from 1 (as a negative particle) and a presumed derivative of 1587; not

left out, i.e. (by implication) inexhaustible:--that faileth not.

see GREEK for 1

see GREEK for 1587

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνέκλειπτος, ον

Adj

unfailing

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνέκλειπτος anekleiptos 1x

unfailing, exhaustless, Lk. 12:33*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASM — Adjective · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%unfailing
unfailing100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceἀνέκλειπτος · 1× in the New Testament
Luke
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
ἐνen in G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
τοῖςho the G3588 Article · dative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DPM — Article · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
οὐρανοῖςouranos heavens G3772 Noun · dative · plural · masculine
273× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for heaven refers to the sky and God's home, symbolizing happiness and power. It's used in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 5:18 and Hebrews 1:10. This concept represents the universe and eternity.
Amplified meaning
the spiritual realm
Tyndale gloss
heaven
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

οὐρανός (ouranos) means heaven or sky, often referring to both the physical vault above and the spiritual realm where God and angels reside. It is used in various contexts, including the universe and divine authority, appearing frequently in the New Testament. Notably, some lexicons mention its use in a metaphorical sense, while others focus on its physical aspects.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐρανός, -οῦ, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for שָׁמַיִם (hence, often pl., οἱ οὐ., v. infr.);]

heaven;

of the vault or firmament of heaven, the sky and the aerial regions above the earth: opp. to ἡ γῆ, He 1:10, II Pe 3:5, 10; ὁ οὐ. καὶ ἡ γῆ, i.e. the world, the universe, Mt 5:18, Mk 13:31, Lk 10:21, Ac 4:24, Re 10:6, al.; ἀπ’ ἄκρων οὐ. ἕως ἄ. αὐτῶν (on the absence of art. aft. prep., v. Bl., § 46, 5), Mt 24:31; ὑπὸ τὸν οὐ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐρανός, -ov, ὁ, [fr.a root meaning ‘ to cover,’ ‘ encompass’; οἵ. Vanicek p. 895; Curtius § 509], heaven; and, in imitation of the Hebr. Οὐ (i.e. prop. the heights above, the upper regions), οὐρανοί, τῶν, οἱ, the heavens [W. § 27, 3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the art. ef. W. 121 (115)), i. 6. 1. the vaulted expanse of the sky with all the things visible in it; a. generally: as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10, 12; 6 ovp. x. ἡ γῆ, [heaven and earth] i. q. the universe, the world, (ace. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking, inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the name of the universe, Gen. i. 1; xiv. 19; Tob. vii. 17 (18); 1 Mace. ii. 37, ete.) : Mt. v.18; xi. 25; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 81; Lk. x. 21; xvi. 17; xxi. 33; Actsiv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 24; Rev. x.6; xiv. 7; xx.11. The ancients conceived of the expanded sky as an arch or yault…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οὐρανός. For οὐρανός in the wide sense of ‘‘sky,’’ ‘‘heaven,” as opposed to γῆ, “earth,” cf. P Leid G1 (p.c. 181-145) (=I. p. 42), a prayer to the gods that they would grant to Ptolemy Philometor and Berenice—kvprelay τῶν [ὑ]πὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χώρωϊν, ‘‘dominationem terrestrium regionum ” (Ed.), and the magic P Lond 1217 (iii/a.p.) (=I. p. 93) πρὶν γενέσθε (/. γενέσθαι) οὐρανὸν ἢ γῆν ἢ θάλασσαν κτλ. The thought of a series of heavens, as in 2 Cor 12%, may be illustrated from PSI I. 29? (iv/a.p. ἢ) ἐπικαλοῦμέί( = al) σε τὸν καθήμενον ἐν TO πρώτῳ οὐρανῷ .. . ἐν τῷ β οὐρανῷ ... ἐν τῷ Ὑ οὐρανῷ κτλ. Ρ Heid 65 (iv/a.p.) (= Se/ections, p. 126) πιστεύομεν γὰρ τὴν πολιτίαϊν σῆου ἐνν οὐρανῷ is evidently a reminiscence of Phil 4293. On the use of the plur. οὐρανοί in the NT, see Blass Gr. p. 83, and the statistics in Hawkins Hor. Syx.* p. 52f. A new subst. οὐρανουσία occurs in P Lond 1218 (iii/a.p.)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐρανός (ouranos) — heaven.

οὐρᾰνός, ὁ,

Doric dialect and Boeotian dialect ὠρανός [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ὄρανος (ὀράνω [Refs 7th c.BC+]

I. heaven: in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.1. vault or firmament of heaven, sky, γαῖα.. ἐγείνατο ἶσον ἑαυτῇ οὐρανὸν ἀστερόεντα, ἵνα μιν περὶ πάντα καλύπτοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; wrapped in clouds, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; above the aether, [Refs 8th c.BC+] continued to regard it as solid (στερέμνιον), [Refs]; defined as αἰθέρος τὸ ἔσχατον by [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἠέλιος δὲ οὐρανοῦ ἐξαπόλωλε, of an eclipse, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.2. heaven, as the seat of the gods, outside or above this skyey vault, the portion of Zeus (see. Ὄλυμπος),[Refs 8th c.BC+]; πύλαι οὐρανοῦ [Refs]; so, later, οἱ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐρανός

ouranos

perhaps from the same as 3735 (through the idea of elevation); the

sky; by extension, heaven (as the abode of God); by implication,

happiness, power, eternity; specially, the Gospel

(Christianity):--air, heaven(-ly), sky.

see GREEK for 3735

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐρανός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

the sky, the heaven

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐρανός ouranos 273x

heaven, the heavens, the visible heavens and all their phenomena, Mt. 5:18; 16:1; 24:29, et al. freq.; the air, atmosphere, in which the clouds and tempests gather, the birds fly, etc., Mt. 6:26; 16:2, 3; heaven as the peculiar seat and abode of God, of angels, of glorified spirits, etc., Mt. 5:34, 45, 48; 6:1, 9, 10; 12:50; Jn. 3:13, 31; 6:32, 38, 41, 42, 50, 51, 58; in NT heaven as a term expressive of the Divine Being, His administration, etc., Mt. 19:14; 21:25; Lk. 20:4, 5; Jn. 3:27

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

οὐρανός οὐρα^νός, οῦ, ὁ, only in sg. heaven: in Hom. and Hes.,

the vault or firmament of heaven, the sky, conceived as a concave hemisphere resting on the verge of earth, upborne by the pillars of Atlas, Od., Hes., etc.; conceived to be of solid metal, χάλκεος, πολύχαλκος, σιδήρεος, Hom.: on this vault the sun performed his course, Od.; the stars were fixed upon it, and moved with it, for it was supposed to be always revolving, Il.

heaven, as the seat of the gods, above this skyey vault, the portion of Zeus, Hom.; πύλαι οὐρανοῦ Heavengate, which the Hours lifted and put down like a trapdoor, Il.

in common language, heaven, the sky, Hom., etc.; πρὸς οὐρανὸν βιβάζειν τινά to exalt to heaven, as Hor. evehere ad Deos, Soph.; εἰς τὸν οὐρ. ἥλλοντο leapt up on high, Xen.: a region of heaven, climate…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPM — Noun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

hev'-'nz (shamayim; ouranoi): On the physical heavens see ASTRONOMY; WORLD. Above these, in popular conception, were the celestial heavens, the abode of God and of the hosts of angels (Ps 11:4; 103:19-21; Isa 66:1; Re 4:2; 5:11; compare Da 7:10), though it was recognized that Yahweh's presence was not confined to any region (1Ki 8:27). Later Judaism reckoned seven heavens. The apostle Paul speaks of himself as caught up into "the third heaven," which he evidently identifies with Paradise (2Co 12:2).

See HEAVENLY.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%heaven
heaven60% · 169×heavens32% · 91×air3% · 8×sky3% · 8×other renderings2% · 5×

281 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial53%subject27%object12%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 273 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνἐκβασιλείαkingship, sovere
ἐν
Article theθησαυρόςa treasure, storκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐκ
λέγωI say, speakArticle theἸωάννηςJohn
ἀπό
θεῖονbrimstone, sulfuκαίand, even, also,ἄγγελοςan angel, messen
ἕωςuntil, as far as
μήNeg
οὐρανόςheavens273×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐπίὁράωI see, look upon
λέγωI say, speak
οὗτοςπατήρfather, Father, δέbut, on the othe
Article the
μένDisjδύναμαιI am powerful, aἄγγελοςan angel, messen
καταβαίνωI go down, come down
Article theἵναin order that, sἐάνCond
ὅς
δέbut, on the otheArticle theπροακούωI hear beforehan

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐρανός · 273× in the New Testament
Matthew Revelation Luke Acts John Mark Hebrews 2 Peter Colossians Ephesians 1 Peter 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 305 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 26c. AD 40

Φησὶ δ’ ὡς „ἐν ἀρχῇ ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν", τὴν ἀρχὴν παραλαμβάνων | οὐχ ὡς οἴονταί τινες τὴν κατὰ χρόνον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.27c. AD 75–95

Ἐν ἀρχῇ ἔκτισεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.12c. AD 100

λέγει γὰρ ἡ γραφὴ περὶ ἡμῶν, ὡς λέγει τῷ υἱῷ: Ποιήσωμεν κατ̓ εἰκόνα καὶ καθ̓ ὁμοίωσιν ἡμῶν τὸν ἄνθρωπον, καὶ ἀρχέτωσαν τῶν θηρίων τῆς γῆς καὶ τῶν πετεινῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῶν ἰχθύων τῆς θαλάσσης.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 1st c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD undated

εὐχὰς καὶ θυσίας ἐπιτελῶν διδόναι ὑμῖν ὑγίειαν νίκην κράτος σθένος κυριείαν τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χωρῶν, σκυλλόμενος δὲ καὶ διασειόμενος παρʼ ἕκαστον εἰκῇ καὶ ὡς ἔτυχεν ὑπό τινων ἐπὶ

εὐχὰς καὶ θυσίας ἐπιτελῶν διδόναι ὑμῖν ὑγίειαν νίκην κράτος σθένος κυριείαν τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χωρῶν, σκυλλόμενος δὲ καὶ διασειόμενος παρʼ ἕκαστον … εἰκῇ καὶ ὡς ἔτυχεν ὑπό τινων

τραχείας … … … … … … … … ἐκ τοῦ Σῶσις Οὐρανοῦ κλήρου περὶ κώμην ἠξίωσά τέ σε, καὶ ἕξεις γὰρ παραφεῖναι ἑκάστης ἀρούρης πυροῦ καὶ

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
ὅπουhopou where G3699 Adverb
82× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Luke than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word asks about the location or place of something, like in Matthew 25:24 and John 3:8. It is used to describe where events occur, and is often translated as 'where' or 'in what place'.
Tyndale gloss
where(-ever)
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅπου (i.e., *hopou*) is an adverb meaning 'where' or 'whither.' It is derived from two components and is used in various contexts, including relative clauses and indirect questions. The New Testament employs it to denote locations and conditions, as seen in verses like Matthew 6:19 and Revelation 2:13. It can also express time or cause, as noted in 1 Corinthians 3:3.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅπου,

adv.

of place, correlat. of ποῦ (q.v.), where.

Prop., of place,

where;

in relative sentences, c. indic: Mt 25:24, 26, Mk 2:4 4:5, 15 5:40 13:14, Jo 3:8 6:62 7:34, 36 11:32 14:3 17:24 20:19, Ro 15:20, Re 2:13; after nouns of place, for relat. prepositional phrase (ἐν ᾧ., etc.), Mt 6:19, 20 13:5 26:57 28:6, Mk 6:55 9:48, Lk 12:33, Jo 1:28 4:20, 46 6:23 7:42 10:40 11:30 12:1 18:1, 20 19:18, 20, 41 20:12, Ac 17:1,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅπου, Mk. xiv. 14; Ileb. vi. 20; ὧδε, Mt. xxii. 12; ἔσω, Mt. xxvi. 58; εἰς with ace. of pers., into one’s house, Acts xvi. 40, but on this pass. see εἰς, A. I. 1a. εἰσέρχ. πρός τινα, to one, i.e. into his house, visit, Mk. xv. 43; Lk. i. 23; Acts x. 8; xi. 3; xvi. 40 GL TTrWH; xxviii. 8; Rey. iii. 20; to an assembly of persons, Acts xvii. 2. Moreover the following deserve notice: a. the phrase εἰσέρχεσθαι καὶ ἐξέρχεσθαι, to go in and out, (the Hebr. ANS) NID, or reversed Nj} NNY, usually denotes one’s whole mode of living and acting, Deut. xxviii. 6; 1 S. xxix. 6, ete.; ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 184 sq.), is used of familiar intercourse with one: ἐν παντὶ χρόνῳ ᾧ εἰσῆλθε x. ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς ὁ κύριος, equiv. to εἰσῆλθε ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς k. ἐξῆλθε ἀφ᾽ ἡμ. Acts i. 21, (Eur. Phoen. 536 ἐς οἴκους εἰσῆλθε x. ἐξηλθ᾽ [W. 624 sq. (580); but ef. B. 390 (334)]); figuratively, of moral pursuits unimpeded…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὅπου, ‘*where,” as in Mk 24, is seen in P Oxy I. 7613 (Α.Ὁ. 179) ὅπου σὺν To ἀνδρὶ καταμένω, ‘where | live with my husband,” in P Lond 8545 (i/ii A.D.) (=III. p. 206), an interesting account of a journey—els Λιβύην ὅπου "Αμμων πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις χρησμῳδεῖ, “to Libya, where Ammon sings oracles to all men,’’ and in the question to an oracle P Oxy XII. 1477? (iii/iv A.D.) εἶ μένω ὅπου ὑπάγω ; ‘shall I remain where I am going?’’ For the meaning “ whither” (ὅποι is not found in the NT), as in Jn 74, see Ost 11628 (Rom.) ὅπου @éAe.—with reference to the sending of certain measures of wheat. Ὅπου ἄν (éav) = ‘‘ wheresoever,’’ as in Mk 98, may be illustrated from P Eleph 1° (B.C. 311-10) (= Selections, p. 2) εἶναι δὲ ἡμᾶς κατὰ ταὐτὸ (cf. Ac 14) ὅπου ἂν δοκῆι ἄριστον εἶναι, “‘and that we shall live together wherever may seem best,” P Oxy XIV. 16397° (B.C. 73 or 442) ὅπου ἂν τῶι καθόλου περιπίπτῃς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅπου (hopou) — where(-ever).

ὅπου,

Ionic dialect ὅκου, Relat., indirect interrogative, and indefinite adverb of Place, correlated to ποῦ:

I. as a Relat., sometimes with genitive loci, τῆς πόλεως ὅπου κάλλιστον στρατοπεδεύσασθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]in some places, [Refs 4th c.BC+] adjective, μέλη, ὅπου (i. e. ἐν οἷς)[Refs 5th c.BC+]: with other Particles, ὅκου δή somewhere or other, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅπου ἄν wherever, with subjunctive, [Refs]; in Trag. the ἄν may be omitted, as ὅπου δ᾽ Ἀπόλλων σκαιὸς ᾖ, τίνες σοφο; [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with genitive, ὅπου ἂν τύχῃ τῶν λεγομένων [Refs 5th c.BC+]anywheresoever, [Refs]; ὅπουπερ with optative, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁπουδάν, ={ὅπου δὲ ἄν}, anywhere, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ὁπουδήποτε, = ubicumque, Dosith.p.410 K.; ὁπουδηποτοῦν anywheresoever, [Refs 1st…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅπου

hopou

from 3739 and 4225; what(-ever) where, i.e. at whichever spot:--in

what place, where(-as, -soever), whither (+ soever).

see GREEK for 3739

see GREEK for 4225

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅπου

Adv

where, whither

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅπου hopou 82x

where, in which place, in what place, Mt. 6:19, 20, 21; Rev. 2:13; whither, to what place, Jn. 8:21; 14:4; ὅπου ἄν, or ἐάν, wherever, in whatever place, Mt. 24:28; whithersoever, Mt. 8:19; Jas. 3:4; met. where, in which thing, state, etc., Col. 3:11; whereas, 1 Cor. 3:3; 2 Pet. 2:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὅπου relat. adv. of Place, properly gen. of an obsol. Pron. ὅπος, correlat. to ποῦ: as a relat., Hdt., attic;—sometimes with gen. loci, ὅπου γῆς, Lat. ubi terrarum, Plat.:— ἔσθ᾽ ὅπου in some places, Lat. est ubi, Aesch., Dem.:—with other Particles, ὅκου δή somewhere or other, Lat. nescio ubi, Hdt.:— ὅπου ἄν or ὅπουπερ ἄν, wherever, with Subjunct., Trag.:— ὁπουοῦν, Lat. ubicunque, Plat.

in indirect questions, ὄφρα πύθηαι πατρός, ὅπου κύθε γαῖα Od., etc.: —with Verbs of motion in pregnant sense, just as, reversely, ὅποι is used with Verbs of rest, κεῖνος δ᾽ ὅπου βέβηκεν, οὐδεὶς οἶδε Soph.:—in repeating a question, ἡ Λακεδαίμων ποῦ 'στιν; Answ. ὅπου 'στίν; (do you ask) where it is? Ar.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
85%where
where85% · 71×wherever12% · 10×other renderings4% · 3×other renderings0% · 0×

84 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial70%predicate28%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 82 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀφανίζωI cause to disapεὑρίσκωI findἀκολουθέωI accompany, att
τόποςa place
Article the
σύ
ἀκολουθέωI accompany, attλέγωI say, speakπαρά
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakτόποςa place
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaven
ἐνArticle the
ὅπουwhere82×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐγώArticle theκαίand, even, also,
Article the
πάσχαAramγραμματεύςa scribe, town-cπαραλυτικόςafflicted with p
ἐάνCond
ἀπέρχομαιI come or go awaκηρύσσωI proclaim, heraεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
οὐNeg
ἔχωI have, hold, poσπείρωI sow, spread, sδεῖit is necessary,
γάρfor
εἰμίI am, existἐνδιαθήκηa covenant, will

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅπου · 82× in the New Testament
John Mark Matthew Revelation Luke Hebrews Acts James 1 Corinthians 2 Peter Colossians Romans
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.60c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ ἕτερον ξύλον, τὸ τοῦ γινώσκειν καλὸν καὶ πονηρόν, οὐ δεδήλωκεν οὔτε εἰ ἐντὸς οὔτε εἰ ἐκτός ἐστι τοῦ παραδείσου, ἀλλ’ εἰπὼν οὕτως „καὶ τὸ ξύλον τοῦ εἰδέναι γνωστὸν καλοῦ καὶ πονηροῦ“ εὐθὺς ἡσύχασεν οὐ δηλώσας ὅπου τετύχηκεν ὄν, ἵνα μὴ ὁ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.152c. AD 75–95

Θέρρου δὲ μισήσαντος τὴν Χαλδαίαν διὰ τὸ Ἀράνου πένθος μετοικίζονται πάντες εἰς Χαρρὰν τῆς Μεσοποταμίας, ὅπου καὶ Θέρρον τελευτήσαντα θάπτουσιν ἔτη βιώσαντα πέντε καὶ διακόσια·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 16.6c. AD 100

ἔστιν, ὅπου αὐτὸς λέγει ποιεῖν καὶ καταρτίζειν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Mich. 5 231ArsinoitesAD 48–AD 51

αι επ … ωμ … … … … προελευσομένους ἡμᾶς ὅπου ἐὰν ὁ κύριος ἡμῶν Γναῖος Οὐηργίλλις Καπίτων τὸν τοῦ νομοῦ διαλογισμὸν ποιῆται πρὸς τὸ

P.Fam.Tebt. 19ArsinoitesAD 118

παρʼ ἑτέρῳ αὐτῆς δανειστῇ οὔσας ἀπεσπακέναι αὐτὸν οὐ δεόντως. Διηρᾶς· διαβεβαιούμέθα καὶ κατὰ τούτων ὅπου εἰσὶν ἀρουρῶν τετελειωκέναι τὰ νόμιμα καὶ κατὰ τῶν ἄλλων. ἀξιοῦμεν οὖν καὶ νῦν χωρὶς

P.Mil.Vogl. 3 129Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 135

καὶ Κρονίωνι, ἵνʼ εἰδῶσι ὀφείλειν αὐτοὺς παρεῖναι ἐπὶ τὸ ἱερώτατον τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος βῆμα ὅπου ἐὰν τὸν τοῦ νομοῦ διαλογισμὸν ἢ δικαιοδοσίαν ποιῆται πρὸς τὴν τοῦ πραάγματος διάγνωσιν. Ἡρακλείδης

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
κλέπτηςkleptēs thief G2812 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
16× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A thief is someone who steals, taking things that don't belong to them. In the Bible, it's used in Matthew 6:19-20 to warn against storing up treasure on earth, where thieves can steal it.
Amplified meaning
one who steals, a robber
Tyndale gloss
thief
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word κλέπτης (i.e., *kleptēs*) means 'thief' and is derived from the verb κλέπτω (i.e., *kleptō*), which means 'to steal.' It refers to someone who steals secretly or by deceit, contrasting with λῃστής (i.e., *lēstēs*), which denotes a robber who uses violence. The New Testament uses this term in various contexts, including literal theft and metaphorically for false teachers.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — κλέπτης, λῃστής from a scan

THESE words occur together John x. 1, 8; but do not constitute there! or elsewhere a tautology, or mere rhetorical amplification (cf. Obad. 5; Plato, Rep. i. 851 c). The κλέπτης and the λῃστής alike appropriate what is not theirs, but the κλέπτης by fraud and in secret (Matt. xxiv. 43; John xii. 6; ef. Exod. xxii. 2; Jer. 11. 26); the λῃστής by violence and openly (2 Cor. xi. 26 ; cf. Hos. vii. 1; Jer. vii. 11; Plutarch, De Superst. 8: οὐ φοβεῖται λῃστὰς 6 οἰκουρῶν) ; the one is the ‘thief’ and steals; the other is the ‘robber’ and plunders, as his name, from ληΐς or λεία (as our own ‘robber,’ from ‘Raub,’ booty), sufficiently declares. They are severally the ‘fur’ and ‘latro;’ ‘fures insidiantur et occulta fraude decipiunt ; datrones audacter aliena diripiunt’ (Jerome, In Osee, vii. 1). ‘Larron,’ however, in French, ‘voleur qui dérobe furtivement et par adresse,’ notwithstanding its…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κλέπτης, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX for גַּנָּב;]

a thief: Mt 6:19, 20 24:43, Lk 12:33, 39, Jo 10:1, 10 12:6, I Co 6:10, I Pe 4:15. Fig., ὡς κ. ἐν νυκτί, I Th 5:2, 4 (κλέπτας, WH, txt., R, mg.; v. Lft., Notes, 73; but cf. also M, Th., l.c.), II Pe 3:10, Re 3:3 16:15. Metaph., of false teachers, Jo 10:8.†

SYN.: λῃστής, a robber, a brigand who plunders, openly, with violence; κ. is a thief who steals in secret, by fraud and cunning (Tr., Syn., § xliv).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κλέπτης, -ov, 6, (κλέπτω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 333, a thief: Mt. vi.19 sq.; xxiv. 43; Lk. xii. 33, 39; Jn. x. 1,10; 1 Co. vi.10; 1 Pet.iv.15; an embezzler, pilferer, Jn. xii. 6; ἔρχεσθαι or ἥκειν ws KA. ἐν νυκτί, i. q. to come unexpectedly, 1 Th. v. 2,4; 2 Pet. iii. 10; Rev. iii. 3; xvi. 15; the name is transferred to false teachers, wlio do not care to instruct men, but abuse their confidence for their own gain, Jn. x. 8. [SyN. see λῃστής, fin.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κλέπτης. PSI IV. 39318 (B.c. 242-1) νυκτὸς παραγενόμενοι κλέπται recalls 1 Thess 52. In P Lond 46:12. (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 70) we have a charm—}” κλέπτην πιάσαι, ‘to catch a thief,” in which there occurs an invocation to Hermes—*$ κλεπτῶν εὑρέτην. With Paul’s list of vices in 1 Cor 69 ἢ Deissmann (LAE p. 320f.) compares the popular names of vices in Latin on the backs of ¢esserae or counters, which were used in an ancient game resembling draughts : thus corresponding to κλέπται we have fur, and to ἅρπαγες arfax. With the use of κλέπται for ‘‘false teachers’’ in Jn 108 we may perhaps compare the mention of apes in a census-paper containing a list of professions, P Petr III. 59 (a)i-9® (Ptol.). These, as the editors point out, can hardly be ‘‘ thieves” in the ordinary sense of the word: they were more likely ‘searchers for stolen property” on the principle ‘‘set a thief to catch a thief.”’…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κλέπτης (kleptēs) — thief.

κλέπτ-ης, ου, ὁ,

thief, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; opposed to ἅρπαξ (a robber), [NT+5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ κ. λόγος, a logical fallacy, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. generally, cheat, knave, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κλέπτης

kleptes

from 2813; a stealer (literally or figuratively):--thief. Compare

3027.

see GREEK for 2813

see GREEK for 3027

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κλέπτης, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a thief

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κλέπτης kleptēs 16x

a thief, Mt. 6:19, 20; 24:43; trop. a thief by imposture, Jn. 10:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κλέπτης κλέπτης, ου, κλέπτω a thief, Il., Aesch., etc.: generally, a cheat, knave, Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

thef: In the Old Testament the uniform translation (17 times) of gannabh, from ganabh, "steal," but gannabh is rather broader than the English "thief," and may even include a kidnapper (De 24:7). In Apocrypha and the New Testament, the King James Version uses "thief" indifferently for kleptes, and lestes, but the Revised Version (British and American) always renders the latter word by "robber" (a great improvement), See CRIMES. The figurative use of thief" as one coming without warning" (Mt 24:43, etc.) needs no explanation.

The penitent thief ("robber," the Revised Version (British and American) Mr 15:27; Mt 27:38,44; "malefactor,"

Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.32c. AD 40

τούτου χάριν καὶ Μωυσῆς φησιν ὅτι „ἐὰν ἐν τῷ διορύγματι εὑρεθῇ ὁ κλέπτης καὶ πληγεὶς ἀποθάνῃ, οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτῷ φόνος·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC
PSI 4 393Philadelphia (Arsinoites)242 BC

ἀμπελουργῶν τῶν ἐξειληφότων τὸν Ζήνωνος καὶ Σωστράτου ἀμπελῶνα. τῆι ιϛ τοῦ Τῦβι νυκτὸς παραγενόμενοι κλέπται τινὲς ὤιχοντο ἔχοντες ἐκ τοῦ Ζήνωνος καὶ Σωστράτου ἀμπελῶνος ἑξηκονταρούρου τοῦ περὶ Φιλαδέλφειαν ἄξιον

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
οὐκou not G3756 Particle · negative
1,622× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a strong 'no', used to deny something completely. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 13:29 and John 1:21. It is a negative answer to a question.
Tyndale gloss
no
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as ), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),

[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]

neg. particle,

not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);

absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.

Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt 1:25 10:26, 38, Mk 3:25 9:37, Jo 8:29, Ac 7:5, Ro 1:16, Phl 3:3, al.; in…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐ (ou) — no.

οὐ,

the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. as the negative of single words,

II. as the negative of the sentence.

I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐ

ou

ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)

ouch ookh

a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or

not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +

nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also

3364, 3372.

see GREEK for 3361

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐ

Neg.prt.

no, not

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐ ou 1x

negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%not
not82% · 1383×certainly6% · 96×surely4% · 70×no longer3% · 50×no2% · 39×other renderings3% · 51×

1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existἐγώαὐτός
ὅς
ἐγώθερίζωI reap, gatherδέbut, on the othe
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύαὐτόςἐγώ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἐνἐπί
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγάρforὅς
οὐnot1622×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐκArticle theἐγώ
μήNeg
παρέρχομαιI pass byεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inπίνωI drink, imbibe
οἶδαI know, remember
ὅτιthat, since, becArticle theτίςIrg
γάρfor
εἰμίI am, existθέλωI will, wish, deArticle the
δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab
ἔρχομαιI come, goσῴζωI save, healArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐ · 1,622× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 John Galatians

8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου

C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
ἐγγίζειengizō does draw near G1448 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
42× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To come near or approach, often used to describe someone drawing closer to God or a physical location. It appears in Matthew 26:46 and Luke 18:40, describing Jesus' approach to his disciples and a blind man.
Amplified meaning
comes near, draws near
Tyndale gloss
to come near
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐγγίζω (i.e., *eggizō*) means to come near or approach. It is built from the root meaning 'near' and is used in various contexts, including approaching a place or time, and metaphorically in relation to God. The New Testament uses it frequently, particularly in references to drawing near to God (James 4:8) and the imminent arrival of the kingdom (Matthew 3:2).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγγίζω (< ἐγγύς).

[in LXX for נגשׁ, קרב, etc. ;]

trans., to bring near: Ge 48:10, Is 5:8.

Intrans., to come near: absol., Mt 26:46, Mk 14:42, Lk 18:40 19:41 21:20, 28 24:15, Ac 21:33 23:15; c. adv., ὅπου, Lk 12:33; c. dat., Lk 7:12 15:1, 25 22:47, Ac 9:3 10:9 22:6; τ. θεῷ, He 7:19, Ja 4:8; seq. εἰς, Mt 21:1, Mk 11:1,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγγίζω ; imp. ἤγγιζον ; Attic fut. ἐγγιῶ (Jas. iv.8 [Bttm. 37 (32); W. § 13, 1 e.]); 1 aor. ἤγγισα; pf. ἤγγικα; (ἐγγύς) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Polyb. and Diod. on; Sept. for Wj) and 3p. to another: Polyb. 8, 6, 7; Sept., Gen. xlviii. 10; Is. v. 8. 2. intrans. 10. draw or come near, to approach ; absol., Mt. xxi. 34; Lk. xviii. 40; [xix. 41]; xxi. 28; Xxil. 1; xxiv. 15; Acts vil. 17; 1. trans. to bring near, to join one thing xxi. 33; xxiii. 15; [ Heb. x. 25]; pf. ἤγγικε has come nigh, is at hand: ἡ βασιλ. τοῦ θεοῦ, Mt. iii. 2; x. 7; Mk.1.15; Lk. x. 11; with the addition ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς, vs. 9; ἡ ἐρήμωσις, Lk. xxi. 20; ἡ ὥρα. Mt. xxvi. 45; ὁ παραδιδούς pe, Mt. xxvi. 46; [Mk. iv. 17; 164 ἐγγύς xiv. 42 (where Tdf. ἤγγισεν}; ὁ καιρός, Lk. xxi. 8; ἡ ἡμέρα, Ro. xiii. 12; τὸ τέλος, 1 Pet. iv. 7; ἡ παρουσία τοῦ κυρίου, Jas. v. 8. Construed with the dat. of the person or the place approached: Lk. vii. 12…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐγγίζω (engizō) — to come near.

ἐγγίζω,

aorist ἤγγισα [Refs 4th c.BC+]: perfect ἤγγικα [LXX+NT]: (ἐγγύς):—bring near, bring up to, τῇ γῇ τὰς ναῦς [LXX+2nd c.BC+]

II. mostly intransitive, approach, [LXX+4th c.BC+]; εἰς θάνατον[LXX]; ἕως[LXX+NT]; to be imminent, ἤγγικεν ἡ παρουσία τοῦ Κυρίου [NT]: also, with genitive, approximate to, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

II.2. to be next of kin, [LXX]

III. with infinitive, to be on the point of doing, ναοῦ -οντος συμπεσεῖν [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγγίζω

eggizo

from 1451; to make near, i.e. (reflexively) approach:--approach, be at

hand, come (draw) near, be (come, draw) nigh.

see GREEK for 1451

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐγγίζω

v.

I come near, approach

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγγίζω engizō 42x

pr. to cause to approach; in NT intrans. to approach, draw near, Mt. 21:1; Lk. 18:35; met. to be at hand, Mt. 3:2; 4:17; μέχρι θανάτου ἐγγίζειν, to be at the point of death, Phil. 2:30; from Hebrew to draw near to God, to offer Him reverence and worship, Mt. 15:8; Heb. 7:19; Jas. 4:8; used of God, to draw near to men, assist them, bestow favors on them, Jas. 4:8

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%has drawn near
has drawn near28% · 12×drawing near19% · 8×he drew near12% · 5×they drew near7% · 3×having drawn near5% · 2×draws near5% · 2×approaching2% · 1×he came near2% · 1×other renderings21% · 9×

43 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb95%adverbial5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 42 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
καιρόςfitting season, αὐτόςπορεύομαιI travel, journe
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
ὅτιthat, since, because
γινώσκωI come to know, λέγωI say, speak
δέbut, on the other ha
ὅτεwhenὡςas, like as, howκαθώςjust as, as
μετανοέωI repent, change my
λέγωI say, speak
ἐγγίζωdoes draw near42×
what comes after →
Article the
βασιλείαkingship, sovereΔαμασκόςDamascusθεόςGod, a god
εἰς
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemΒηθφαγήPropArticle the
δέbut, on the other ha
αὐτόςArticle the
γάρfor
Article the
αὐτός
εἰςἕτοιμοςready, prepared

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐγγίζω · 42× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts James Mark Hebrews 1 Peter Philippians Romans
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 98 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.9c. AD 40

οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι ὁ Ἀβραὰμ „ἔτι ἦν ἑστηκὼς ἐνώπιον κυρίου καὶ ἐγγίσας εἶπε Μὴ συναπολέσῃς δίκαιον μετὰ ἀσεβοῦς“ (Gen.

JosephusThe Jewish War 1.617c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ εἴσεισι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα καὶ τῇ τόλμῃ παρακροτήσας ἑαυτὸν ἤγγιζεν ὡς ἀσπασόμενος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.3c. AD 100

τὸ τέλειον σκάνδαλον ἤγγικεν, περὶ οὖ γέγραπται, ὡς Ἐνὼχ λέγει.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Oxy. 19 2234OxyrhynchitesAD 31

καὶ ἀνέσπασαν ἰχθῦν ἄξιον ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ἀργυρίου τάλαντον α, καὶ λογοποιουμένου μου αὐτοῖς ἤγγισαν με ὡς μέλλοντές με ἐκπο … ν. ἐπεὶ δὲ κατὰ πολλὰ βιάζονταί με, τὴν

οὖν ταῦτα μεταλαβὼν ἀφίωκα πάντα κατὰ πετρῶν ταῦτα τοιαῦτά ἐστι, καὶ οὐ δίδωμι ἐργασίαν ἐγγίσαι τῶν ἐκεῖ· ἀρκείσθω γάρ μοι ἡ προτέρα ζημία. ἀσπάζομαι Σεραποῦν καὶ τὰ ἔκγονα ἡμῶν·

P.Gen. 1 74Ptolemais Euergetis (?) (Arsinoites)AD 139–AD 145

τῆς πόλεως ἔτι ἡμέρας δέκα . ἤκουσεν ἡμῶν ὁ στρατηγὸς καὶ εἶπα αὐτῷ μὴ ἐγγίζειν τῷ γρ … … ι μήτε αὐτὸν μήτε ἄλλον τινά· καὶ γὰρ Ἀντωνῖνος ἐπὶ

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
οὐδὲoude nor G3761 Conjunction · negative
140× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'nor' or 'neither', used to connect negative ideas or options, like in Matthew 6:15 and Romans 4:15. It helps to rule out alternatives or emphasize a point.
Tyndale gloss
nor
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐδέ (oude) is a negative particle that functions as a conjunction meaning 'and not' or 'nor,' and as an adverb meaning 'not even.' It combines elements of negation and exclusion, often appearing in phrases like 'neither... nor.' The New Testament uses it in various contexts, such as in Matthew 6:15 and Acts 4:32.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐδέ, negative particle, related to μηδέ as οὐ to μή.

As conjc., and not, also not, neither, nor: Mt 6:15, Lk 16:31, Ro 4:15, al.; οὐ . . . οὐδέ, Mt 5:15 10:24, Mk 4:22, Lk 6:43, 44, Jo 6:24, Ac 2:27, Ro 2:28, al. (v. Bl., § 77, 10).

As adv., not even: Mt 6:29, Mk 6:31, Lk 7:9, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐδέ, [fr. Hom. down], a neg. disjunctive conjunction, compounded of ov and δέ, and therefore prop. i. q. but not; generally, however, its oppositive force being lost, it serves to continue a negation. [On the elision of ε when the next word begins with a vowel (observed by Tdf. in eight instances, neglected in fifty-eight), see TW. Proleg. p. 96; cf. WH. App. p. 146; W.§5, 1 a.; B. p. 10 sq.] It signifies 1. and not, continuing a negation, yet differently from οὔτε; for the latter connects parts or members of the same thing, since τέ is adjunctive like the Lat. que; but οὐδέ places side by side things that are equal and mutually exclude each other [(?). There appears to be some mistake here in what is said about ‘mutual exclusion’ (cf. W. § 55, 6): οὐδέ, like δέ, always makes reference to something preceding; οὔτε to what follows also; the connection of clauses negatived by οὔτε is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οὐδέ is used adverbially = ‘not even,” as in Mk 651, 1 Cor 5}, in P Oxy XIV. 16608 (iii/a.D.) τοὺς ἐγδοχεῖς οὐκ ἔπεμψας ὡς ἐνετειλάμην σοι, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ἔγραψας εἰ ἀπετάξαντο, ‘you have not sent the middlemen as I bade you, and you have not even written whether they departed” (Edd.), 24. 1765+ (iii/A.D.) οὐδὲ ἅπαξ ἠξίωσάς μοι γράφειν, ‘‘not even once have you deigned to write me.” For οὐδὲ εἷς, as in Ac 455, cf. 26. 16689 (iii/A.D.) Kal οὐκέτι φόβος οὐδὲ εἷς Ever, “Sand there is no longer any fear at all” (Edd.), 2d. I. 1221? (iii/iv A.D.) ἡμεῖ[ς] δὲ aypeve τῶν θηρίων δυνά[με]θα οὐδὲ ἕν, ‘‘and we cannot catch a single animal ”’ (Edd.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐδέ (oude) — nor.

οὐδέ,

negative Particle, related to μηδέ as οὐ to μή, partly conjunction, partly adverb:

__A CONJUNCTION, but not, mostly answering to μέν (sometimes written divisim), [Refs 8th c.BC+], but not, is followed by οὐδέ, nor, ἄλλοις μὲν πᾶσιν ἑήνδανεν, οὐδέ ποθ᾽ Ἥρῃ, οὐδὲ Ποσειδάων᾽, οὐδὲ γλαυκώπιδι κούρῃ [Refs]

__A.II more frequently and not, nor: sometimes without a negative preceding, Κίρκη δ᾽ ὡς ἐνόησεν ἔμ᾽ ἥμενον, οὐδ᾽ ἐπὶ σίτῳ χεῖρας ἰάλλοντα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δεινὸν γάρ, οὐδὲ ῥητόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: after a negative compound, ὃν ἠτίμησ᾽ Ἀγαμέμνων, οὐδ᾽ ἀπέλυσε θύγατρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐδέ

oude

from 3756 and 1161; not however, i.e. neither, nor, not even:--neither

(indeed), never, no (more, nor, not), nor (yet), (also, even, then)

not (even, so much as), + nothing, so much as.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 1161

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐδέ

Neg.cj.

neither, nor, not even

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐδέ oude 143x

negative conj., neither, nor, and not, also not, Mt. 5:15; 6:15, 20, 26, 28; when single, not even Mt. 6:29; 8:10

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj-N — Conjunction · negative
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ-N CONJunction or conjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
57%nor
nor57% · 82×not even21% · 30×neither15% · 22×not5% · 7×other renderings3% · 4×

145 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial43%subject9%object7%verb5%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 140 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,κύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
μνῆμαa tomb, monumentπολύςmuch, many, ofteεἷςone
ἀλλάbut, except
αὐτόςδύναμαιI am powerful, aἡμέραa day
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
Article theἀπόοὐδείςno one, none, no
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaven
Article theἐν
οὐδέnor140×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, ἄγγελοςan angel, messenυἱόςa son, descenden
γάρfor
Article theἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am aἀπό
ἐγώ
λέγωI say, speakποιέωI do, makeσύ
εἷςone
ῥῆμαa thing spokenὅςτὶς
ἐκ
θέλημαwill, wish, desiβάτος (I)a thorn bush or ἀκαθαρσίαuncleanness, imp

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐδέ · 140× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Revelation 1 Corinthians Mark Galatians Romans Hebrews 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59330Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)249 BC

Θοτέως αὐτοὶ ἄνευ ἡμῶν διελογίσαντο καὶ οὐ δυνάμεθα παρακολουθῆσαι τί πεποιήκασιν ἕως τοῦ νῦν, οὐδὲ αἰτούμενοι τὸν λόγον ἐτόλμησαν ἡμῖν δοῦναι. καὶ περὶ τούτων οὖν πλεονάκις ἐπεμαρτυρόμην Ἰάσονι ὅτι

P. Grenf. 1 12Latopolis151 BC

Παμφίλου ὄντα συγγενῆ, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ Ἐσθλάδου τοῦ Ἐσθλάδου. Ἀλλωι δὲ οὐθενὶ οὐθὲν καταλείπω οὐδε δίδωμι. Μαρτυρες … … … … δεξι … … μελίχρως τετανὸς … οὐλὴ

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

ς οὕτως ὑπὸ γε… ς δεομένων δὲ τῶν … ντων ὑμῶν διαλήψεως … καὶ οὐδὲ μέχρι τοῦ νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
σὴςsēs moth G4597 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Luke than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A moth is an insect that eats away at clothing, as seen in Matthew 6:19-20 and Luke 12:33. It represents decay and destruction.
Amplified meaning
an insect that destroys, corruption
Tyndale gloss
moth
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σής is a noun meaning 'moth,' specifically referring to the clothes moth that damages woolen fabrics. It appears in the New Testament in Matthew 6:19-20 and Luke 12:33, where it serves as a metaphor for decay and impermanence. The word has Hebrew origins and is used metaphorically to describe bookworms in literary contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σής, σητός (late gen. for cl. σεός), ὁ,

[in LXX: Jb 4:19, Is 50:9 (עָשׁ), Is 51:8 (סָס), al. ;]

a moth, clothes moth: Mt 6:19, 20, Lk 12:33.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σής, onrds, 6, (Hebr. 0d, Is. li. 8; wy, Job iv. 19; xiii. 28), a moth, the clothes-moth, [B. D.s.v. Moth; Alex.’s Kitto s. v. Ash]: Mt. vi. 19 sq.; Lk. xii. 33. (Pind., Arstph., Aristot., Theophr., al.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σής, *‘a moth.” As a parallel to Mt 659 Lendrum cites (CR xx. (1906), p. 307) Pindar /ragm. 222— Διὸς παῖς ὁ χρυσός᾽ κεῖνον οὐ σὴς οὐδὲ κὶς δάπτει.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σής (sēs) — moth.

σής, ὁ,

genitive σεός (as if from σεύς, which is given as nominative by [Refs 4th c.AD+]; genitive σέων [Refs 5th c.BC+] —the forms σητός, σῆτες, σητῶν, etc., were later, as in [Refs 4th c.BC+] [same place], etc.:—moth, [χρυσὸν] οὐ σ. οὐδὲ κὶς δάπτει [NT+5th c.BC+]

2. metaphorically, σῆτες ἀκανθοβάται or -λόγοι, of the Grammarians, bookworms, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σής

ses

apparently of Hebrew origin (5580); a moth:--moth.

see HEBREW for 05580

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σής, σητός, ὁ

n.m.

a moth

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σής sēs 3x

a moth, Lk. 12:33; Mt. 6:19f.*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σής σής, οῦ, ὁ, a moth which eats woollen stuff, Lat. tinea, Ar.:—metaph. for a bookworm, Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

moth (`ash; compare Arabic `uththat, "moth"; colloquial, `itt; cac, "worm" (Isa 51:8); compare Arabic sus, "worm," especially an insect larva in flesh, wood or grain; ses, "moth" (Mt 6:19,20; Lu 12:33); setobrotos, "moth-eaten" (Jas 5:2)):

The moths constitute the larger division of the order Lepidoptera. Two of the points by which they are distinguished from butterflies are that they are generally nocturnal and that their antennae are not club-shaped. Further, the larva in many cases spins a cocoon for the protection of the pupa or chrysalis, which is never the case with butterflies. The Biblical references are to the clothes-moth, i.e. various species of the genus Tinea…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Moth

Heb. ‘ash, from a root meaning “to fall away,” as moth-eaten garments fall to pieces (Job 4:19; 13:28; Isa. 50:9; 51:8; Hos. 5:12).

Gr. ses, thus rendered in Matt. 6:19, 20; Luke 12:33. Allusion is thus made to the destruction of clothing by the larvae of the clothes-moth. This is the only lepidopterous insect referred to in Scripture.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

By the Hebrew word we are certainly to understand some species of clothes-moth (tinea). Reference to the destructive habits of the clothes-moth is made in (Job 4:19; 13:28; Psalms 39:11) etc. (The moth is a well-known insect which in its caterpillar state is very destructive to woollen clothing, furs, etc. The egg of the moth, being deposited on the fur or cloth, produces a very small shining insect, which immediately forms a house for itself by cuttings from the cloth. It east away the nap, and finally ruins the fabric. There are more than 1500 species of moths. --McClintock and Strong’s Cyclopedia.)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The common moth is an insect destructive to woolen cloths. The egg is laid by a small shining worm; which by another transformation becomes a miller. Allusions to the moth, as devouring clothes, and as a frail and feeble insect, are frequent in Scripture, Job 4:19 13:28 27:18 Isa 50:9 Ho 5:12 Mt 6:19,20. See GARMENTS.

The insects called in general moths, of which the above is only one species, are exceedingly numerous. The main genus is called by naturalists Phaloena, and contains more than fifteen hundred species. Moths fly abroad only in the evening and night; differing in this respect from the tribe of butterflies that fly only by day. Their larva, or the worms from which…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%moth
moth100% · 3×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὅπουwhere, whither
γῆthe earth, soil,
οὔτεNeg
ὅπουwhere, whither
οὐδέNeg
ἐγγίζωI come near, app
σήςmoth
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
βρῶσιςeating, food, a
οὔτεNeg
βρῶσιςeating, food, a
διαφθείρωI destroy, waste, co

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσής · 3× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 5 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn Joseph 23c. AD 40

εἰ ἐπὶ γῆς ἐτάφης τῆς σῆς, παρηγορούμην, ἐθεράπευσα, ἐνοσήλευσα πρότερον, ἀποθνῄσκοντι τελευταίων ἀσπασμῶν ἐκοινώνησα, τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς συνέκλεισα, ἐπεδάκρυσα κειμένῳ τῷ νεκρῷ, πολυτελῶς ἐκήδευσα, τῶν νομιζομένων οὐδὲν παρέλιπον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.288c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐμοὶ πρὸς σὲ καὶ πατέρα τὸν σόν, εἴπερ Λαβάνου παῖς τυγχάνεις, οἰκειότης ἐστὶ πρεσβυτέρα τῆς τε σῆς καὶ ἐμῆς γενέσεως·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.2c. AD 100

οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὑμεῖς πάντες ὡς ἱμάτιον παλαιωθήσεσθε, καὶ σὴς καταφάγεται ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD
P. Cairo Cat. 10374 descr.Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)201 BC–102 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος. διεθέντος μου διὰ τῆς σῆς σπουδῆς ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα πέντε, γίνεται τάλαντα ε. εὐτύχει.

Τῆς δὲ σῆς δικαίας ἀντιλήψεως … τὴν ἐπὶ σὲ καταφυγὴν πεποιημέναι ἀξιοῦμεν σʼ ἐμβλέψαντʼ εἰς τὸν γεγονότα

P.Cair. Goodspeed 5Pathyris130 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διαθέντος μου διὰ τῆς σῆς σπουδῆς ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα πέντε γίνεται τάλαντα ε εὐτύχει

do sell the possessions of you and do give alms; do make to yourselves purses not growing old, a treasure unfailing in the heavens where thief not does draw near nor moth destroy;
διαφθείρει·diaphtheirō destroy; G1311 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Luke as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To destroy or ruin something, like the corrupting influence of sin in 1 Timothy 6:5. It can also mean to decay or perish. This word is used to describe moral or physical destruction.
Amplified meaning
corrupts, ruins
Tyndale gloss
to destroy
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διαφθείρω is built from the prefix δια- and the root φθείρω, meaning to destroy or corrupt utterly. It covers a range of meanings from physical destruction to moral corruption. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like Luke 12:33 and Revelation 11:18, where it signifies total ruin or moral decay.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δια-φθείρω

[in LXX chiefly for שׁחת hi. ;]

to destroy utterly: Lk 12:33, Re 11:18; pass., to be destroyed, disabled: Re 8:9, II Co 4:16.

In moral sense, to corrupt, deprave: τ. γῆν, Re 11:18; pass., διεφθαρμένοι τ. νοῦν, I Ti 6:5.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

διαφθείρω; 1 aor. διέφθειρα ; Pass., [pres. διαφθείροpar]; pf. ptep. διεφθαρμένος ; 2 aor. διεφθάρην; Sept. very often for nmv, occasionally for an; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; 1. to change for the worse, to corrupt: minds, morals; τὴν γῆν, i.e. the men that inhabit the earth, Rey. xi. 18; διεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν, 1 Tim. vi. 5, (τὴν διάνοιαν, Plat. legg. 10 p. 888 a.; τὴν γνώμην, Dion. Hal. antt.5, 21; τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, Xen. an. 4, 5, 12). 2. to destroy, ruin, (Lat. perdere); a. to consume, of bodily vigor and strength: ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται [is decaying |, 2 Co. iv. 16; of the worm or moth that eats provisions, clothing, ete. Lk. xii. 33. b. to destroy (Lat. delere) : Rev. viii. 9; to kill, διαφθείρειν τοὺς etc. Rev. xi.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διαφθείρω, as befits a perfective compound, denotes usually a completed process of damage. It is used for the death of animals, as P Strass I. 2451 (A.D. 118) καὶ διεφ[θά]ρησί(αν) μετὰ Φαῶ(φι) aly(es) a, P Oxy I. 7424 (a.p. 116—registration of sheep) ἐξ ὧν διεφθάρη πρ(όβατα) ἕξ, ἄρνας δύο, and so P Amh II. 735 (a.p. 129-130) ; P Lond 3098 (A.D. 146) (= IL. p. 73) διεφθάρη μετὰ τὴν ἐξαρίθίμησιν) κάμηλος [a], P Oxy VI. 938% (ili/iv A.D.) ὡς ἐκ τούτου κινδυνεύειν τὰ κτήνη διαφθαρῆναι, ‘with the result that the oxen are in | Parr II. j du Gopos danger of destruction ” (Edd.), BGU IV. rroo™ (n.c. 5), a contract with a wet-nurse, is made διὰ τὸ τῆς Καλλιτύχης ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ διατεθείσης διεφθάρθαι τὸ ταύτης γάλα. Vettius Valens uses it thrice of abortion. Passing to inanimate things, we find the verb used in a British Museum papyrus, P Lond Inv No. 18854 (a.p. 114-5), with reference to public…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διαφθείρω (diaphtheirō) — to destroy.

διαφθείρω,

future -φθερῶ[Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect -φθέρσω[Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect διέφθαρκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— passive, future διαφθᾰρήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect διαφθερέομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: 3rd.pers. plural pluperfect διεφθάρατο [Refs]:—destroy utterly, πόλιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; make away with, kill, τινά [Refs]; destroy, ruin, ἥδ᾽ ἡμέρα φύσει σε καὶ διαφθερεῖ S.[same place]; τὴν τύχην [Refs]; δ. χεῖρα weaken, slacken one's hand, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; spoil, break, ὑγιῆ λίθον [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; τὰ θυρώματα διεφθάρθαι [Refs]; δ. τὴν συνουσίαν break up the party, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

διαφθείρω

diaphtheiro

from 1225 and 5351; to rot thoroughly, i.e. (by implication) to ruin

(passively, decay utterly, figuratively, pervert):--corrupt, destroy,

perish.

see GREEK for 1225

see GREEK for 5351

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διαφθείρω

v.

I destroy, waste, corrupt

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διαφθείρω diaphtheirō 6x

to corrupt or destroy utterly; to waste, bring to decay, Lk. 12:33; 2 Cor. 4:16; to destroy, Rev. 8:9; 11:18 (2x); met. to corrupt, pervert utterly, 1 Tim. 6:5*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

διαφθείρω fut. -φθερῶ epic -φθέρσω perf. -έφθαρκα and διέφθορα Pass., fut. -φθα^ρήσομαι ionic -φθερέομαι ionic 3rd pl. plup. διεφθάρατο to destroy utterly, Il., Hdt., attic: to make away with, kill, destroy, ruin, Soph., etc.; δ. χέρα to weaken, slacken one's hand, Eur.: to disable a ship, Hdt.:—absol. to forget, Eur.

in moral sense, to corrupt, ruin, Aesch., Plat., etc.:— esp. to corrupt by bribes, Hdt., Dem.: to seduce, Lys.

οὐδὲν διαφθείρας τοῦ χρώματος having changed nothing of his colour, Plat.

Pass. to be destroyed, crippled, disabled, Hdt.; τὴν ἀκοὴν διεφθαρμένος deaf, id. Hdt.: τὰ σκέλεα δ. with their legs broken, id. Hdt.; τὰ ὄμματα δ. blind, Plat.; τὰς φρένας Eur.; τὸ φρενῶν διαφθαρέν loss of one's mind, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%destroy
destroy33% · 2×being brought to decay17% · 1×corrupted17% · 1×destroyed17% · 1×destroying17% · 1×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σήςa moth
οὐδέNeg
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
ἐγώ
διαπαρατριβήuseless debate
πλοῖονa ship, vessel
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
μέγας
διαφθείρωdestroy;
what comes after →
Article the
διαφθείρωI destroy, wasteγῆthe earth, soil,
ἀλλάbut, except
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιαφθείρω · 6× in the New Testament
Revelation 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians Luke
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 23 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.25c. AD 40

κρύπτεται μὲν ἀεὶ καὶ φυλάττεται τὰ πάθη ἐν Σικίμοις — ὠμίασις δὲ ἑρμηνεύεται, ὁ γὰρ πονούμενος περὶ τὰς ἡδονὰς φυλακτικὸς τῶν ἡδονῶν ἐστιν —, ἀπόλλυται δὲ καὶ διαφθείρεται παρὰ τῷ σοφῷ, οὐ πρὸς βραχύν τινα χρόνον, ἀλλ’ „ἕως τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας“,…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.75c. AD 75–95

Ὁ δὲ θεὸς τοῦτον μὲν τῆς δικαιοσύνης ἠγάπησε, κατεδίκαζε δʼ οὐκ ἐκείνων μόνων τῆς κακίας, ἀλλὰ καὶ πᾶν ὅσον ἦν ἀνθρώπινον τότε δόξαν αὐτῷ διαφθεῖραι καὶ ποιῆσαι γένος ἕτερον πονηρίας καθαρόν, ἐπιτεμόμενος αὐτῶν τὸν βίον καὶ ποιήσας ἐτῶν οὐχ ὅσα…

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.9.3c. AD 140

οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἀπὸ τῶν πολλῶν ἐδεσμάτων ἀσθένειαν τῇ σαρκὶ αὐτῶν ἐπισπῶνται καὶ λυμαίνονται τὴν σάρκα αὐτῶν: τῶν δὲ μὴ ἐχόντων ἐδέσματα λυμαίνεται ἡ σὰρξ αὐτῶν διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν τὸ ἀρκετὸν τῆς τροφῆς, καὶ διαφθείρεται τὸ σῶμα αὐτῶν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Oxy. 2 357 col. 1 descr.OxyrhynchitesAD 76–AD 100

, γίνονται πρόβατα … , αἶγες … , ἄρνες … , ἐξ ὧν διεφθάρησαν αἶγες δύο … … … … ν … … πρόβατα … , αἶγες

P.Oxy. 2 357 col. 2 descr.OxyrhynchitesAD 76–AD 100

Παγγᾶ Εἰσείου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας αἶγας εἴκοσι ἕξ, ἐρίφους ἕξ, γίνονται λβ, ἐξ ὧν διεφθάρησαν αἶγες τέλειοι ὀκτώ , ἔριφοι δύο , καταλείπονται αἶγες κβ, καὶ ἠγόρασα παρὰ Φιλοξένου

P.Alex.Giss. 39Apollonopolites HeptakomiasAD 113–AD 120

ερ … ανται … … τους καὶ γυναῖκας διώκειν μετʼ ἄλλων καὶ μικροῦ διαφθεῖραι τὸν ἄνθρωπον εἰ μὴ φυγὼν ἔτυχεν. ταῦτα γὰρ οὐδὲ ἄλλοτε μὲν προσῆκε … εσειν,

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate